JP2019063653A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of favorably arousing a player's interest in a display performance.SOLUTION: VDP 135 executes geometry calculation including arrangement processing of image data onto a world coordinate system, and executes rendering including projection processing onto a projection plane so as to create drawing data as two-dimensional data. When executing a sea surface performance, the VDP uses a sea-surface object as an object. The sea-surface object includes multiple surface data, and a sea surface display is executed by setting color information according to directions of the surface data. In this case, arrangement modes of the respective surface data groups of the sea-surface object are determined by using sea-surface animation data. Further, an arrangement mode of each of the surface data contained in the surface data group is individually determined by using first normal line map data and second normal line map data.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, the display unit displays an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display more three-dimensional images by using three-dimensional defined image data instead of simply displaying two-dimensional images (for example, a patent). Reference 1).

JP 2004-208830 A

  Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably enhancing the player's interest in display effects.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 is an arrangement means for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space Data generation means for projecting image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating generation data based on the data projected on the projection plane; Storage means for storing the generated data,
Display control means for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means;
In the gaming machine provided with
The image data of an object to be placed in the virtual three-dimensional space by the placement means has data capable of defining a plurality of faces, and a three-dimensional shape can be determined by the plurality of face data. Image data of multi-faced object is included,
The data generation means
When the image data of the multi-faced object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space to display a multi-faced image corresponding to the image data of the multi-faced object over a plurality of update timings, the virtual three-dimensional of the plurality of face data Data reading means for reading group data from the memory means which makes it possible to individually change each direction in the space;
Application changing means for changing the mode in the case of applying the aggregate data to the image data of the multi-faced object among the plurality of update timings;
By changing color information to be applied to the surface data whose orientation has been changed, in units of the surface data according to the orientation of the surface data, a display color of at least a part of the multi-face image A display color changing unit that enables an image display to be different between a plurality of update timings;
Equipped with
The aggregate data includes unit control data for determining the orientation of one of the surface data in a number larger than the number of the surface data.
The data reading means reads a plurality of sets of data,
The application changing means applies the unit control data of each of a plurality of the aggregate data to the one surface data, and the application change means applies the unit control data of the plurality of aggregate data to the image data of the multi-surface object. By changing the positional relationship in the virtual three-dimensional space along with the switching of the update timing, the surface data to which a plurality of unit control data are applied in the image data of the multi-surface object and the plurality of unit control data Is characterized in that the correspondence relationship of is changed in accordance with the switching of the update timing.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably enhance the player's interest in display effects.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process performed by a main control apparatus. It is another form of the processing structure of a main control apparatus, and is a flowchart which shows main processing. It is another form of the processing structure of a main control apparatus, and is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing a state in which drawing data is created along with execution of drawing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hidden surface process using Z buffer performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the masks performed by display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete content of a 1st mask display. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete content of a 2nd mask display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the masks performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation generation command corresponding | compatible process performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the display mode background performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for symbols performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the background performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for backgrounds performed by VDP. It is a timing chart which shows the timing by which another preservation data for the 1st display mode and another preservation data for the 2nd display mode are created. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for connection objects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the connection object performance performed by VDP. (A)-(c) It is an explanatory view for explaining connected object production. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining an object for particle dispersion, (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a texture for particle dispersion, (c) to (e) are for explaining key data FIG. (A) is a flowchart which shows the calculation processing for a connection object performed by display CPU, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for a blend. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for particle | grain dispersion presentation performed by VDP. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the particle dispersion rendition, (b-1) and (b-2) are for simply explaining on what trajectory each particle single-piece image is displaced. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows another form of the setting process for particle | grain dispersion presentation performed by VDP. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the object for sea surface, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating normal line map data. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of applying a pair of normal line map data to the object for sea surface. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view for explaining how to apply change data to each surface data. (A) is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for sea surface display performed by display CPU, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the animation data for sea surface. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the sea surface display performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the normal-line parameter performed by VDP. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of setting color information to each surface data. (A) is a flowchart which shows the color information setting process for sea surface display performed by VDP, (b) is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process for sea surfaces performed by VDP. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a sea surface display, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating simply the setting aspect of the color information of the area | region in which sea surface display is performed. It is a flowchart which shows another form of the color information setting process for sea surface display performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation processing for effects at the time of opening / closing execution mode performed by display CPU. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each area of VRAM used when adjusting a focus in VDP, (b) is a flowchart which shows the drawing data synthetic | combination processing performed by VDP. (A) is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process for focus effects performed by VDP, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a focus range and each blurring range. (A) is a flowchart which shows the blurring generation | occurrence | production process performed by VDP, (b-1) and (b-2) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating the extraction aspect of the unit area in the case of blurring generation | occurrence | production processing . (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a state in which the focus display is not performed, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a state in which the focus display is performed. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a special object, (b-1) to (b-3) are explanatory views for explaining a first partial texture, and (c-1) to (c) -4) is an explanatory view for explaining the second partial texture. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for special characters performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the texture mapping process for special characters performed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of pattern change display.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine") which is a type of gaming machine will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) disposed behind the inner frame.

  An inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. In addition, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated backward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

  The gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip and has a function to lock the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. And has a function to lock the front door frame 14 against the inner frame in an unopenable manner. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  The game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating opening 23, a lower operating opening 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display unit 33, a display unit 34 and the like are provided. ing.

  When the ball is entered into the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating opening 23, and the lower operating opening 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20. A payout of a predetermined number of winning balls is executed based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 20, and game balls which have not entered the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. Further, on the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and it is discharged not only from the gaming area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the gaming area after passing through the opening Not included. However, in the following description, the variable winning device 22, the upper operation opening 23, the lower operation opening 24 or the entry of the game ball to the through gate 25 is clearly entered in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of the game ball to the out port 27. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating opening 23 and the lower operating opening 24 are unitized as an operating opening device and installed on the game board 20. The upper operating opening 23 and the lower operating opening 24 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 23 and 24 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower operating port 24 is provided with a motorized part 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supporting state or non-guided state) of the motorized part 24a, the gaming ball can not win the lower operating port 24, and the lower operating port is opened by the motorized part 24a being in the open state (supporting state or guiding state). It will be possible to win 24.

  The variable winning device 22 has a large winning opening 22a communicating with the back side of the game board 20, and an open / close door 22b for opening and closing the large winning opening 22a. The open / close door 22b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win or hardly wins, and is switched to a predetermined open state in which the game ball is easy to win in the internal lottery when winning transition to the open / close execution mode It is supposed to be. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when a big hit is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening aspect of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit, with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings. There is an aspect to be done.

  The main display unit 33 and the character display unit 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the main display unit 33, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 as a trigger, and the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is performed as a result of stopping the variable display. The result of the internal lottery made on the basis is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning on the upper operating opening 23 and the winning on the lower operating opening 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the row is based on the winning on the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated on the main display 33 which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined display result is After being displayed and the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode.

  In addition, although the main display part 33 is comprised by the segment display which the some segment light emission part is arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display, It may be configured by a CRT, a dot matrix, or another type of display device. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which the color of the species is switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the prize display portion 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 25, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is Explicitly shown. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning on the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electronic part opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the symbol display portion 34 and the variable display is performed. After being stopped, shift to the open state. In the open state, the motorized accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variably displays a symbol that is a kind of symbol. Further, a center frame 32 is disposed on the variable display unit 26 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface of the symbol display device 31, and a disadvantage that the visibility of the display surface is reduced due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 31, variable display of symbols is started based on winning on the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed in the main display unit 33, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 31 in accordance with that. Then, for example, in the game round where the game result is a big hit result, in the symbol display device 31, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on an effective line set in advance.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a view showing a display surface G of the symbol display device 31. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) to 2 (j), a pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine main designs each having a numeral "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped picture It is constituted by the sub pattern. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows SA1, SA2 and SA3 of upper, middle and lower are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, main symbols and sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row SA1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower figure pattern row SA3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper pattern row SA1 and the lower pattern row SA3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row SA2, nine main symbols of “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of “9” and the main symbol of “1” The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row SA2, ten main symbols are arranged and configured by twenty symbols. Then, on the display surface G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (b), on the display surface G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine 3 × 3 symbols are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. Further, on the display surface G, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set. Then, the variation display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row SA1 → lower symbol row SA3 → middle symbol row SA2, and all symbol rows SA1 are formed in a combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ SA3 is finished, the big hit moving picture is displayed as the occurrence of the normal big hit result or 15R probability variation big hit result described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "specific symbol", and when the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is displayed stopped. Also, the main symbol with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to the "non-specific symbol", and when a big hit usually occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed Ru.

  In addition, when it becomes explicit 2R probability variation big hit result which it mentions later, fluctuation indication of all design line SA1-SA3 ends in the state where combination of the specified design which differs from the combination of the same design is formed, after that, An explicit movie is displayed.

  In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described symbol. For example, only numbers may be variably displayed as a pattern.

  Also, based on winning on any of the operation openings 23, 24, variable display is started on the main display 33 and the symbol display device 31, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game play.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32, a first reserved light emitting unit 35 corresponding to the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided. The number of game balls winning in the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of the held holdings is displayed by lighting of the first holding light emitting unit 35.

  At the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second reserved light emitting unit 36 corresponding to the character display unit 34 is provided. The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 25 is suspended up to four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by lighting of the second reserved light emitting unit 36. Note that the function of each reserved light emitting unit 35, 36 may be performed by display in a partial area of the symbol display device 31.

  A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is constituted by the rail portion 37, and is fired from a game ball firing mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in an inner frame. The game ball is guided to the top of the game area. In the gaming ball launch mechanism, the launch operation of the gaming ball is performed by operating the launch handle 41 provided in the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited thereto and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

  A light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window 42 as a part of the light emitting means. In addition, on both left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44, speaker units 45 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided.

  Below the window portion 42 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 bulging toward the front side are vertically juxtaposed. An upper plate 46a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a similarly opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper tray 46a has a function for temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the later described payout device and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper tray 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

  In the upper bulging portion 46, in the area facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating device 48 having an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the operation device for effect 48 is manually operated by the player in order to set the content of effect on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 or the like to a predetermined effect content.

  On the back side of the inner frame, a main control device, an audio light emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. In addition, a back pack unit is provided on the back of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a dispensing mechanism including a dispensing device, a dispensing control device, a power supply and a firing control device. Is mounted. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 has a main control board 51 which controls the main control of the game. Incidentally, in the main control unit 50, the substrate box accommodating the main control substrate 51 etc. is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening is provided. You may As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can not be separably joined, and the structure of the joining portion (crimping portion) which requires destruction of a predetermined portion in the case of separation, A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left on is pasted across the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 is a ROM 53 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

  As the ROM 53, storage means (that is, non-volatile storage means) that can be accessed randomly at the time of reading the control program and fixed value data and that do not require external power supply for storage are used. Further, the configuration in which the control and operation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions are separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power supply and emission control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 51 generates necessary operation power for each, and supplies the generated operation power. Incidentally, the operation power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 130 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply and emission control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and the power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, so that the MPU 52 executes processing for power failure. It is possible to

  Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As part of the various sensors, there is a detection sensor provided on a one-on-one basis for winning support entry parts such as general winning opening 21, variable winning device 22, upper operating opening 23, lower operating opening 24 and through gate 25. It is included, and in the MPU 52, a winning determination (entry determination) for each ball entry portion is performed. Further, the MPU 52 executes a big hit occurrence lottery and a big hit result type lottery based on winning on the upper actuation opening 23 and the lower actuation opening 24, and executes a reach occurrence lottery for each game round and a determination lottery for a display continuation period.

  Here, the structure for performing various lottery in MPU52 is demonstrated.

  The MPU 52 uses the various counter information during game play to perform a big hit lottery, setting of display of the main display 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the symbol display 34 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a symbol Change in reach random number counter C3 used for reach occurrence lottery when display device 31 deviates, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of big hit random number counter C1, and fluctuation in main display 33 and symbol display device 31 The variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Furthermore, the electric combination release counter C4 used in the drawing of whether or not the electric combination 24a of the lower operation opening 24 is in the electric combination release state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and returns to 0. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 54a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Among them, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when winning in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 occurs. It is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b as a means.

  The holding ball storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE is provided with a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3 and a fourth reserve area RE4, according to the winning history to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. The numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a is stored in any one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, the first reserve area RE1 → the second reserve area RE1 → the second reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 when winning in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 occurs a plurality of times consecutively. Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of RE 2 → third reserve area RE 3 → fourth reserve area RE 4. By providing four reserve areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, the game ball's winning history of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum. In addition, the holding area RE is provided with a holding number storage area NA, and in the holding number storage area NA, to specify the number for which the winning history to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is held and stored. Information is stored.

  The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, or may be singular.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the main display section 33 is started, and at the start of one game cycle, Based on the various numerical value information stored in the execution area AE, the determination of success or failure is performed.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  Specifically, for each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24.

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a yes / no table in a yes / no table storage area as a yes / no information group storage unit in the ROM 53. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the hit / fall lottery means.

  Under the gaming state where the low probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state where the high-probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is twenty. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the lottery means after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, (3) under the end of the opening / closing execution mode A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the motorized accessory 24 a of the operation port 24.

  As an aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening and closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winnings on the variable winning device 22 is relatively high and low between the start and the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed 15 times (number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 seconds (high frequency time) Is continued until the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high-frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time) Is continued until the number of winning prizes for the large winning opening 22a reaches 6 (low frequency number).

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the release handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area in 0.6 sec. . On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, winning of the gaming ball does not substantially occur.

  The number of times of opening and closing of the special winning opening 22a in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening, and the opening number of times for one opening are the low frequency winning mode in the high frequency winning mode. Further, if the frequency of occurrence of winnings on the variable winning device 22 becomes high between the start of the open / close execution mode and the end, the value is not limited to the above and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a greater number of opening and closing times, a longer opening limit time for one opening, or a greater number of opening limits for one opening than the low frequency winning mode. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning of the variable winning device 22 occurs in the open / close execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode It is good to be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the gaming ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, one opening is The product of the firing cycle of the gaming balls and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. Also, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one big winning opening 22a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which winning of the variable winning device 22 substantially does not occur.

  As a support mode in the motorized character 24a of the lower operation port 24, when compared in the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric character 24a of the lower operation port 24 Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening state per unit time becomes relatively high and low And is set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the electronic combination open state in the electric combination open lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized jack 24a is released when the electronic-wiring-released state is elected is set to a greater number of times than in the low-frequency support mode. The time is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state is elected and the open state of the motorized accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, the high frequency support mode has a shorter time than the low frequency support mode as a securing time that is minimally secured after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed and the next electric combination opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the winning of the lower operation port 24 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the upper operation port 23 is higher than that of the lower operation port 24 but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operation port 24 to the lower operation port 24. The probability of winning will increase. And, when the winning a prize to the lower operation opening 24 occurs, because the payout of the specified number of game balls is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the balls much be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time than in the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is also possible to increase the probability of being in the electronic combination open state winning state in. In addition, a securing time (for example, based on the winning on the through gate 25) is secured on the occasion where the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after one electric combination opening lottery is performed (for example In the configuration where multiple types of variable display to be executed are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that the short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured upon the next electric combination opening lottery being performed after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed (i.e., shorter) And one of the condition of any combination or any combination of the shortening of the average time of the securing time and the increase of the winning probability. This may enhance the advantage of the frequent support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. Then, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, in the high-frequency support mode, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is made when the number of games has reached the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the normal jackpot state (low probability correspondence special game state).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. . The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it. In other words, the 15R probability variation big hit result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the 15R probability variation big hit state (high probability correspondence special game state).

  Note that the normal gaming state refers to the state where the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, in relation to the above-mentioned respective gaming states.

  In the distribution table, among the values of "0 to 29" jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" usually correspond to the jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result "15-29" correspond to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the aspect of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified by the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result being set as the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation big win results, the advantage for the player is the high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode is the highest 15R probability variation jackpot result, opening and closing execution In the support mode, although it becomes the low frequency winning mode in the mode, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result becoming the high frequency support mode becomes the lowest. Thereby, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In addition, as one kind of probability variation big hit result, opening and closing execution mode becomes low frequency winning mode, furthermore, after completion of opening and closing execution mode, as well as acceptance lottery mode becomes high probability mode, support mode is maintained in the mode until then The implicit 2R probability variation big hit result (intense high probability correspondence game result or the result of becoming a latent certainty change state) which is different may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variation jackpot result is achieved.

  Furthermore, as one kind of out result in the success or failure lottery, while transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the special out result that transition of the success or failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur after the end may be included. . In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variation big hit result and the special outlier result as described above are set, the open / close execution mode transitions to the low frequency win mode and the support mode remains in the previous mode. While it is common in that it is common that the transition mode of the lottery mode is different, for example, when either an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or an exceptional result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 31. Expected effects are provided with a symbol display device 31 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result in the game round where the open / close execution mode is a high frequency winning mode The display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 31 is started. Say.

  Two types of expectation rendering are set up: the above-mentioned reach display, and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the occurrence of a special display result in a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is made by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. A combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows is included. Further, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface after reducing or non-displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  Specifically, the reach display according to the fluctuation display of the symbol is generated as a high-frequency winning mode on a preset effective line in the display surface of the symbol display device 31 as a step before the fluctuation display of the symbol is ended. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be a combination of corresponding big hit symbols, and the variation display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed. It is to do.

  If the display contents of FIG. 3 are specifically explained, first, in the state where the variation display of symbols is finished in symbol row SA1 of the upper row and the variation display of symbols is finished in symbol row SA3 of the lower row further, any one is effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same number attached to the lines L1 to L5, and the variation display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row SA2 in a situation where the reach lines are formed. It becomes a reach indication by being treated. Then, when the high frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol attached with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol row SA2 in the middle row is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is ended.

  In the advance notice display, after variation display of symbols is started on the display surface of the symbol display device 31, in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, or a part of the symbol rows In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3. In addition, the background image is a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the pattern on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice may occur at any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode to be the high frequency winning mode, and in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode to be the low frequency win mode, the reach random number It is not executed regardless of the value of the counter C3. In addition, in game times which are not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to in response to the occurrence of reach display with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Will be executed if On the other hand, the main control unit 50 does not determine whether to display the advance notice, but the sound emission control unit 60 does.

  For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the fluctuation display time in the main display unit 33 and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 31. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the main display section 33 and the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of the fluctuation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 31. Note that when determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  For example, the motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 250, and to return to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the motorized jack 24a in the open state based on the value of the stored motorized jack release counter C4.

  A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power supply and emission control device 57 is connected. The payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the result of the winning determination on the winning combination ball entry unit. The payout control device 55 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 50. The power supply and emission control device 57 transmits a release permission command based on the fact that the emission handle 41 is operated. Based on the release permission command received from the main control device 50, the power supply and release control device 57 drives the game ball emission mechanism 58 to cause the game balls to be emitted toward the game area.

  Further, the main display unit 33 and the symbol display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the main display unit 33 and the symbol display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52 at each game play. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not the motorized combination 24a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the combination display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 52, a variable winning driving unit for opening and closing the opening and closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22 and an electric combination driving unit for opening and closing the electric combination 24a of the lower operation port 24 are connected. . That is, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the motorized product 24a is won, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the motorized product drive unit so that the motorized product 24a is opened and closed.

  Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and transmits various commands for effect to the sound emission control device 60.

<Process Performed by MPU 52 of Main Control Device 50>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 repeatedly executes predetermined game progression processing after power-on. In the pachinko machine 10, the normal process repeatedly executed in the first cycle and the second cycle shorter than the first cycle are activated as the game progressing process, and are executed by interrupting the normal process. Timer interrupt processing is set.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Note that this process is activated periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 52.

  First, in step S101, a reading process is performed. In the reading process, the states of various types of winning detection sensors are read, the states of the various types of winning detection sensors are determined, and processing for storing the winning detection information is executed. Further, when the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the winning detection sensor corresponding to the generation of the winning ball, a winning ball command for instructing the payout control device 55 to pay out the winning ball is set.

  In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In the subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric character release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4 are respectively incremented by one, and are cleared to zero when their counter values reach the maximum value.

  In the subsequent step S104, a winning process for through is carried out accompanying the winning of the through gate 25. In the through winning process, the value of the motorized product release counter C4 updated in the above step S103 is used as the electric symbol under the condition that the number of award holding memories stored in the electric symbol holding area 54c is less than four. It stores in reserve area 54c.

  Thereafter, in step S105, a winning process for the operation opening is performed in conjunction with the winning of the operation openings 23 and 24. In the winning process for the operation port, when the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 has a winning, the number of start-up storages stored in the storage ball storage area 54b is the upper limit number (for example, “ 4) The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b under the condition that it is less than 4). . In this case, of the vacant reserve areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserve area RE, the first reserve area is stored in the reserve area corresponding to the current start reserve storage number. After the process of step S105 is performed, the timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the normal processing. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started up with the power on is performed. As an outline thereof, the processing of step S201 to step S209 is executed as processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of step S210 and step S211 is executed with the remaining time.

  In step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 55. Further, when a predetermined effect command is set, it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  In the subsequent step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by one, and the counter value is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In the subsequent step S203, game number control processing for controlling a game in each game number is executed. In this game number control process, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 31, and display control of the main display unit 33 are performed.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. In the gaming state transition process, when the game number corresponding to the big hit is finished, the transition process to the open / close execution mode is executed, and the open / close process of the variable winning device 22 is started. When the open / close execution mode is started, during the open / close execution mode, or when the open / close execution mode is ended, various commands for the open / close execution mode are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. Further, when the open / close execution mode is ended, transition to the lottery mode or transition to the support mode is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type according to the game round which is the start timing of the mode.

  In the following step S205, processing for demonstration display is executed. In the processing for demonstration display, a start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for demonstration start predetermined in advance does not start without a new game play being started after the game play ends in a situation where the open / close execution mode is not in progress. Execute determination processing whether or not it has been done. In addition, after the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period for demonstration start (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without newly starting a game play. Execute determination processing whether or not it has been done. Then, if it is determined that it has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  In addition, a demonstration display means the thing of the waiting for start display displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, when the predetermined start waiting period has passed. In the demonstration image, an image is displayed in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 perform a predetermined operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation Alternatively, after or instead of the display of the displayed image, a moving image of a maker name, a model name or a predetermined character may be displayed. In addition, in a configuration in which demonstration display is performed by animation of symbols variably displayed on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, the symbol may be configured to use a symbol finally displayed in the last game run as the symbol. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

  In the following step S206, a process for supporting the electric combination for driving and controlling the electric part 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is executed. In the electronic-support support process, the information stored in the electronic-arm holding area 54c of the RAM 54 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric combination 24a, and to open and close the electric combination 24a and to use the combination. The display control of the display unit 34 is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S207, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball emission control process, the solenoid of the game ball emission mechanism 58 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the emission permission signal is input from the power supply and emission control device 57. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In the following step S208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is stored in the RAM 54 or not. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when occurrence of power failure is confirmed and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power-off flag is not stored, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed is finished, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S209, that is, the last time It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing. Then, updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

  That is, in step S210, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. In step S211, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using such remaining time. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S208 that the power-off flag is stored, it means that power-off has occurred, so the processing at the time of power-off after step S212 is executed. That is, in step S212, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S213, and after the access to RAM 54 is prohibited in step S214, the power is completely shut off and processing is performed. Continues an infinite loop until it can not execute.

  Next, the game number control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game number control process, it is first determined in step S301 whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in effect, the game play control process is ended without executing the process of step S302 and subsequent steps. That is, when in the opening / closing execution mode, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the operation openings 23 and 24 has occurred.

  If the open / close execution mode is not in effect, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 33 is displaying variable. If the main display unit 33 is not in the variable display mode, the process proceeds to the processing for starting the game play of steps S303 to S305.

  In the processing for starting a game, first, in step S303, it is determined whether the number of start-holding balls N is "0". The case where the starting pending ball number N is "0" means that the pending information is not stored in the pending ball storage area 54b. Therefore, the game number control process ends.

  If the starting pending ball number N is not "0", data setting processing for setting data stored in the pending area RE of the pending ball storage area 54b for variable display is executed in step S304. Specifically, the data stored in the first reserve area RE1 of the reserve area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the data stored in the first reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 are shifted in order to the lower area side. Thereafter, the variation start process is executed in step S305, and then the game play control process is ended.

  The variation start process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, a process of determining whether or not the suspension information corresponding to the current fluctuation start process corresponds to a big hit is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a big hit will be made by referring to the numerical information concerning the big hit random number counter C1 among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE and the hit / fail table corresponding to the current pass / fail lottery mode. Do.

  In the following step S402, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is won. If the jackpot is won, the type determination process is executed in step S403. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified with reference to the numerical value information related to the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE, and the distribution table.

  In the subsequent step S404, stop result setting processing corresponding to the big hit result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern aspect to be finally displayed on the main display unit 33 as a final stop in the game round related to the start of fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 53, The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. In the stop result table for the big hit result, the type of pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is set to be different for each type of the big hit result, and in step S404, it is specified in step S403. The information of the pattern aspect according to the type of the big hit result is stored in the RAM 54.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S402 that the jackpot has not been won, in step S405, stop result setting processing for out of time is executed. Specifically, the information of the pattern aspect to be finally displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for out of time stored in advance in the ROM 53, The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. The information of the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After the process of step S404 or step S405 is performed, in step S406, a setting process of the variable display time is performed.

  In this process, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 54 a of the RAM 54 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the gaming number relating to the start of the change is the jackpot result. In addition, even if it is not the jackpot result, when the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation generation display time table for reach generation stored in the ROM 53, and the fluctuation thereof The display time information is set in the variable display time counter provided in the RAM 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display is not generated, the reach non-occurrence change display time table stored in the ROM 53 is referred to, and the change display time information corresponding to the value of the present change type counter CS is acquired Then, the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter. Incidentally, the fluctuation display time that can be acquired with reference to the non-reach generation fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation fluctuation display time table.

  In addition, the fluctuation display time information at the time of reach non-occurrence | occurrence | production is set so that the fluctuation display time may become short, so that the number of starting pending balls is large. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach non-range is selected so that the short fluctuation display time is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variation display time table for generation is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not change according to the number of start-hold balls and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation display time at the time of reach occurrence. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, a variable display time table may be individually set for each of the case of outreach and the case of non-reach.

  After the setting process of the fluctuation display time is executed in step S406, the fluctuation command and the type command are set in step S407. The fluctuation command includes information on fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach generation fluctuation display time table, and thus fluctuation Even if the command for the command does not include the information on the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 60 which is the control device on the sub side can specify the presence or the absence of the reach from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Note that the change command may include information directly indicating the presence or absence of reach.

  Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as information on the game result, any of information on the jackpot result, information on the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, information on the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and information on the deviation result as the game result.

  The fluctuation command and the type command set in step S407 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 7). After the process of step S407 is performed, the variation display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 33 in step S408. Thereafter, the variation start process is ended.

  Returning to the explanation of the game play control process (FIG. 8), when the main display unit 33 is displaying a change, the processes of steps S306 to S309 are executed. In the processing, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game number has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, processing for variable display is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode in the main display unit 33 is changed. Thereafter, the game play control process ends.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, fluctuation end processing is executed in step S308. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 54 is specified in the process of step S404 or step S405, and the main display unit 33 is displayed so that the aspect of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. Display control.

  In the following step S309, a change end command is set. The change end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 60 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 7). The sound emission control device 60 ends the effect in the game play based on the received change end command. In addition, a command corresponding to that is transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 70, and the display control device 70 displays the final stop symbol combination in the game round (final stop display). Thereafter, the game play control process ends.

<Another form of processing configuration in MPU 52 of main controller 50>
The processing configuration executed by the MPU 52 is not limited to the above, and may be the following processing configuration. 10 and 11 are flowcharts for explaining another form of processing in the MPU 52, and FIG. 10 shows main processing executed when supply of operation power is started, and FIG. 11 shows the main processing. The figure shows a timer interrupt process which is periodically interrupted and started.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the main process, first, in step S501, a start-up process is performed upon power-on. In the following step S502, access to the RAM 54 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and emission control device 57 is turned on, and in the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the RAM. In step S505, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in the subsequent step S506, it is determined whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data.

  If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, and the power-off flag is stored and the RAM determination value is normal, the power-off flag is erased from the RAM 54 in step S507, and the RAM in step S508. Delete the judgment value. Thereafter, in step S509, permission of interruption is set, in step S510, updating of the random number initial value counter CINI is performed, and in step S511, updating of the variation type counter CS is performed. Then, after the processes of steps S509 to S511 are performed, the process returns to step S509, and the processes of steps S509 to S511 are repeated.

  Note that the interrupt prohibition setting may be performed immediately after the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S509. In this case, the timer interrupt process described later may be configured to wait until the next interrupt permission setting is performed when the activation timing is reached in a state where the interrupt prohibition setting is performed. .

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S512 to S513. Also, when the occurrence information of the power shutoff is not set, or when the abnormality of the data stored is confirmed by the RAM determination value, the process similarly shifts to the processes of steps S512 to S513.

  In step S512, the use area of the RAM 54 is cleared to "0", and in step S513, initialization of the RAM 54 is performed. Then, it transfers to the process of step S509-step S511.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the other embodiment.

  In the timer interrupt process, the same process as step S101 to step S105 is executed in step S601 to step S605.

  Thereafter, in step S606, update processing of the variation type counter CS is executed, in step S607, the game time control processing is executed, in step S608, the gaming state transition processing is executed, and in step S609, processing for demonstration display Is executed in step S610, the game ball launch control process is executed in step S611, and the external output process is executed in step S612. Thereafter, this timer interrupt processing is ended. The detailed contents of each of these processes are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9 above.

<Speech emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the sound emission control device 60 includes a sound emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

  As the ROM 63, storage means (that is, non-volatile storage means) that can be accessed randomly at the time of reading the control program and fixed value data and that do not require external power supply for storage are used. Further, the configuration in which the control and operation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions are separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The operation device 48 for performance and the main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, the speaker unit 45, and the display control device 130 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62 There is.

  By receiving the fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 50, the MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start an effect for game circulation, and executes a game circulation effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effects for the game use, and the effect for ending the game use is executed. Also, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to start the jackpot effect or it is necessary to proceed, and the jackpot effect processing is executed. Also, by receiving the command for demonstration display transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to start the demonstration display, and executes the processing for demonstration display.

  Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received.

  In the game use effect start process, the process of grasping the fluctuation display time for grasping the fluctuation display time of the corresponding game time and the reach display grasping process of grasping the presence or absence of the reach display based on both commands of fluctuation command and type command And, the grasping process of the jackpot result occurrence which grasps the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the grasping process of the jackpot type which grasps the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasped result in reach display grasping process, jackpot result occurrence grasping process and jackpot type grasping process, a symbol for determining the type of symbol to be displayed on display surface G of symbol display device 31 in the final game round Execute type identification processing. Then, based on the result of each grasping process, the display control device, the fluctuation pattern command including the information of fluctuation display time and the information of the type of display effect, and the symbol designation command including the information of the type of symbol to be displayed in the final stop Send to 130

  Further, in the game-use effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process as to whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the advance notice is also executed. Then, if it is determined that the advance notice display has been generated, a notice command including the information of the notice display type is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  In addition, in the game circulation effect start process, the display light emission table for the game circulation and the voice table for the game circulation are read out from the ROM 63 based on the processing result of each of the above processes. The light emission aspect of the display light emission part 44 in the advancing process of applicable game times is prescribed | regulated by the display light emission table for game times. In addition, an output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progressing process of the corresponding game number is defined by the sound table for the game number.

  In the game turn effect end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game turn are ended. In addition, in the game circulation effect end process, an end command including information to be ended of the game circulation effect is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for jackpot effect, it grasps the effect mode such as opening time, each round time, each round time, each round time and ending time, and for the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped result Command is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the big hit effect and the voice table for the big hit effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 during the big hit effect To define.

  In the process for demonstration display, the presentation mode of the demonstration display is grasped based on the received command for demonstration display, and the demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for demonstration display and the voice table for demonstration display are read out from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of sound from the speaker unit 45 during demonstration display To define.

  The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 is the processing for controlling the light emission of the first reserved light emitting unit 35 and the second reserved light emitting unit 36 besides the above processing. included.

  Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the effect operating device 48 is operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the effect operating device 48 based on the operation of the operation unit of the effect operating device 48. And execute operation handling processing. In addition, even when the state being operated is released, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding processing is executed.

  Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation device 48 for effect, the effect that the display mode is changed is executed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. The display mode is a state in which a predetermined type is defined as a standby image displayed until the game turn is started and a game turn image displayed in a state where the game turn is being executed, and a plurality of types are displayed. The display mode of is set. The detailed contents of the display mode and the processing configuration relating to the switching of the display mode based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect will be described in detail later.

<Display control device 130>
The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

  The display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted, as shown in FIG. .

  The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. In detail, the display CPU 131 is connected to the input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137 Be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Be

  The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133 and the VRAM 134 via the bus, and based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 60, various data stored in the memory module 133 are stored in the work RAM 132 or VRAM 134. Give a transfer instruction to transfer. In addition, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via the bus, and based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60, a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 31 to display a three-dimensional image (3D image) Do. The memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described below.

  The memory module 133 is a storage unit that stores control data including control programs and fixed value data in advance, and also stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory which does not require an external power supply for storing data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write memory as a read only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes image data for an object such as a symbol or a character displayed on the symbol display device 31, image data for a texture to be attached to the object, and one frame And the image data for the back side which composes the image of the rearmost side in the image of FIG.

  Here, an object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygon plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set in the image data for an object, with reference coordinates preset for each object as an origin. That is, in the image data for each object, relative positions (that is, orientations and sizes) of the polygons are three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

  A texture is an image to be attached to each polygon of an object. By attaching a texture to an object, a display image including an image corresponding to the object, such as a pattern or a character, is generated. The way of holding the image data for texture is arbitrary, but includes, for example, at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table to be referred to in determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is.

  The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The way of holding the image data for the back is arbitrary, but for example, two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state of being compressed. Incidentally, when the image data for the back side is arranged in the world coordinate system, a plate polygon is used.

  The work RAM 132 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 132 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into the internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 134 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. The VRAM 134 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  The VRAM 134 includes an expansion buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data (generated data) is created by the VDP 135. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144 and a mode buffer 145, the details of which will be described later.

  The VDP 135 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. This is a kind of drawing circuit for operating the image processing device 31b incorporated so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 135 is formed into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to one another via a bus, and also connected to an I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

  The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 causes the register 153 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131. The geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object specified as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space finally corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface G.

  The rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and pastes the texture on each clipped object based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, and determines the appearance of the object. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object on a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, performs various adjustments based on depth information, and performs frame adjustment of drawing data for one frame, which is two-dimensional data. Create at 142 The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list, a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute processing according to the contents of the above. In addition, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the processing only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

  Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of the frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display surface G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The present invention is not limited to the full color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b in the frame buffer 142, drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using drawing data created in one of the frame areas. Creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

  In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data generated in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is generated in the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 through the connected output port 138. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame regions 142 a and 142 b to be output to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 31 and converted into gradation data. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

  Further, when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode, the display mode control unit 154 executes a predetermined process based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. The predetermined process will be described later.

<Basic Process in Display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, the main processing to be started when the supply of the operation power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main process.

  In the main process, first, in step S701, an initialization process is performed.

  In the initial setting process, an initial adjustment process of the scaler of the display circuit 155 is performed. In the initial adjustment process, when an image signal is output based on drawing data created in each of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134, the image signal is output in correspondence with the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. Thus, the command for initial resolution adjustment is transmitted to the VDP 135. The initial adjustment value is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as a resolution initial adjustment command.

  By transmitting a resolution initial adjustment command to the VDP 135, numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the resolution adjustment area of the scaler in the register 153 of the VDP 135. Thus, when an image signal is output from the VDP 135 to the symbol display device 31, an image signal corresponding to drawing data is output in a state of being adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

  In the initial setting process, an initial adjustment process of ground color is executed. In the initial adjustment process, a ground color initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 135 such that numerical value information set as an initial value in unit areas of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 becomes the initial numerical value information. The initial numerical information is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as a ground color initial adjustment command.

  When the VDP 135 transmits a ground color initial adjustment command, initial numerical information is stored in an area for ground color adjustment in the register 153 of the VDP 135. As a result, when the drawing data is created, the ground color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit areas for which updating from the initial numerical information has not been performed. Although black is set in the present pachinko machine 10 as an initial ground color, the present invention is not limited to this and is optional.

  After the initial setting process is performed in step S701, various interrupts are permitted in step S702. Thus, execution of command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in the display CPU 131 is permitted. Thereafter, in the main process, the process of step S702 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing will be described.

  The command interrupt process is a process that is activated with the highest priority when the strobe signal is received from the audio light emission control device 60, regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received at the input port 137 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 132, and a flag indicating that a command is newly received is set in the corresponding area. Thereafter, the command interrupt process is ended, and the process returns to the process before the start of the command interrupt process.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle, specifically, a cycle of 20 msec.

  When the VDP 135 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 135 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display surface G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end An image signal is sequentially output to the arranged dots, and an image signal is output from left to right dots in order from the top to each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface G. In this case, the VDP 135 outputs the V interrupt signal to the display CPU 131 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 131 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt process can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was activated, the V interrupt process is newly activated.

  In the V interrupt process, first, in step S801, a command analysis process is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 132 are analyzed. In the following step S802, it is determined based on the analysis result in step S801 whether or not a new command has been received. If a new command has been received, command corresponding processing is executed in step S803.

  In the command handling process, a data table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 133. In the data table, when displaying a moving image corresponding to a received command on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined. It is an information group.

  Here, as the command received by the display CPU 131 from the voice emission control device 60, there are a variation pattern command, a symbol designation command, and a notice command as described above. When these commands are received, a data table necessary for executing the game-use effects corresponding to the respective commands is read out on the symbol display device 31. Further, there is an end command as the command to be received, and when the command is received, a data table necessary for finally stopping the game effect currently being executed is read out. The received command includes various commands for jackpot effect, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the jackpot effect is read out. The command to be received includes a command for demonstration display, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the demonstration display is read. Further, based on the read data table, other program data necessary for executing the process is also read.

  After executing the command corresponding process in step S803, pointer update process is performed in step S804. In the pointer updating process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, the display CPU 131 can grasp the processing required to display an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time.

  In the following step S805, task processing is performed. In task processing, in order to display an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 135 is performed. Details of the task processing will be described later.

  In the following step S806, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task processing is a drawing target, and information of parameters updated in the task processing is also set. The VDP 135 creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 according to the drawing list. The processing in this VDP 135 will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the V interrupt processing is ended.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In task processing, first, in step S901, setting processing for control start is executed. In the setting process for control start, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 131 at the current processing time is executed. The individual image refers to one two-dimensional image defined by still image data such as image data for the back side, and one three-dimensional defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. It is an image.

  About the setting process for control start Specifically, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 132 searches an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in order to control the individual image, and corresponds one-to-one to the individual image grasped as the control start target Reserve free buffer space to Furthermore, the initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the control start parameters corresponding to the individual image are set for the initialized free buffer areas.

  In the following step S902, the control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed, and is an individual image that may be included in an image of one frame after the current processing cycle.

  In the following step S903, the background calculation process is executed. In the background processing, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for lightening and darkening, and projection in the world coordinate system are used for the image for the backmost side that constitutes the image of the background and the background character. A process of computing and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test specification is executed.

  In the subsequent step S904, effect calculation processing is performed. In the effect calculation process, the above-mentioned various parameters are calculated and derived for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect.

  In the following step S 905, symbol operation processing is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is executed for an image of a pattern to be subjected to variable display in each game run.

  Incidentally, in each processing of step S903 to step S905, processing of updating the control start parameter set in step S901 is executed. Also, in each processing of step S903 to step S905, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image in accordance with a specific pattern each time image update timing is used is used. The animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 133, and is determined according to the type of individual image.

  Thereafter, in step S906, processing for grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task processing ends. In the process of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, a process of grasping an individual image to be set as a drawing object in the current drawing list, out of the individual images subjected to control update in each process of steps S903 to S905. Run. The grasping is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 are set more than the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S906. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 131 may be identical to the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 135. In this case, the process of step S906 is executed. There is no need.

  Note that, in the setting process for control start in step S901, the control start timings of the individual images may be set to be dispersed in order to disperse the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Basic processing in VDP 135>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

  The VDP 135 sets the value of the register 153 based on the command sent from the display CPU 131, creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly performed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 when the output start timing of the image signal is determined in advance.

  The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer is set, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created an image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of the various designation information will be described later. When moving image data is included as image data handled by the VDP 135, in the header information, the presence / absence of decoding designation and information on the address at which the moving image data to be decoded is stored in the memory module 133 are included. It may be set.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the above-mentioned header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system at the time of creation of the drawing data this time are set. Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to be the numerical value information of serial numbers, and the information of the parameters is set in correspondence with each numerical information in a one-to-one manner.

  In the drawing list in FIG. 15A, the image data for the back is set as the first drawing object, and the background object A is set as the second, the background object B as the third, and so on. There is. Further, image data for effect is set as the order after the image data for background, for example, the object for effect A is set to the m-th, the object for effect B is set to the m + 1-th,. There is. In addition, the image data for symbols is set as the order after the image data for these effects, for example, the symbol object A is set as the n-th, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1-th, ... There is.

  The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the set order may be the reverse of the above order, and the image for symbols The image data for presentation or the image data for background may be set after the data, and the image data for design is set in the order between the predetermined image data for presentation and the image data for other presentation It may be done.

  Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... There are several types of parameters set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, the parameter P (1) of the image data for the back surface is information of the address of the area where the image data for the back surface is stored in the memory module 133 and the back surface image data. Information of the coordinates (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data of 1 and the world coordinate system when setting the image data for back side Information on the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle in the image, scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, and the image for the back surface In the case of setting data, uniform α value information indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) is set.

  Here, coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of image data for an object. Moreover, although the information of this coordinate is set to the image data for the object, it is not set to the image data for the texture. In the image data for texture, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the image data for object. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 in texture mapping.

  When rendering camera information including information on coordinates and orientation of a virtual camera in the case of projecting image data for the back on a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing in the parameter (P1) and image data for the back And light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in.

  In the parameter (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. In the Z-buffer method, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) aligned on the Z axis when many objects or a two-dimensional image overlap in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. For the depth adjustment processing method, the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set to the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When applying the Z buffer method, the Z buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, a Z sort method is set as a method of performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b for each pixel aligned on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to numerical information corresponding to color information of each pixel aligned on the Z axis. In this state, addition processing of the numerical information and calculation processing for fusion are performed. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, the processing is started when the effect image is displayed.

  The parameter (P1) includes information on α data specification indicating the application status and application target of α data, fog specification information indicating the application status and application target of fog, and a background created to display a background image. Information on separate storage designation indicating the presence or absence of separate storage for drawing data for an image is set.

  Here, the α value is transmission information of the corresponding pixel. There are two methods of setting the α value on the drawing list: a method of specifying the above-mentioned uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of two-dimensional still image data and image data for texture, and is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as image data. The alpha data can make transmission information different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same image data for texture. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting the α value.

  As described above, since the alpha value and the alpha data are uniformly set, the transparency of the two-dimensional still image data and the image data for texture is not finely controlled in pixel units, but uniformly for all pixels. In the situation where it should be controlled, it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to cope with the uniform α value, and it becomes possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying the α data.

  Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, in the Z-axis direction. Fog is used when expressing fog or expressing in a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, fog is applied in a fixed manner to an image of one frame. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, another fog is set to the object in a situation where the texture is not displayed because it is too dark when applying the same fog as the other objects to the object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction. It is good to be configured. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect by setting the fog while preventing the above-mentioned texture from being lost.

  The separate storage means writing and storing in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b, in order to use the drawing data for the background image once created in the subsequent frame as it is. As shown in FIG. 4, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode area 145a and a second mode area 145b so as to correspond to each display mode on a one-to-one basis. The specific content of this separate storage will be described in detail later.

  In the other parameters such as parameter P (2), as shown in FIG. 15 (c), among the various information in FIG. 15 (b) above, instead of the information on the image data for the back side, Information is set. As these pieces of information, information of an address of an area in which an object or texture is stored in the memory module 133 is set.

  The drawing process in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created along with the execution of drawing processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 131 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, in step S1002, a setting process for background is executed.

  In the setting process for the background, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object for the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether the image data and the object for the character are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If it is not arranged, a vacant buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a vacant buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. Thereafter, the memory module 133 grasps and reads the address at which the image data is stored, and coordinates values of the local coordinate system for the image data so as to become the coordinates, rotation angle and scale specified in the drawing list Is converted into coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and is set in the secured buffer area.

  If it is allocated, the update processing of various parameters set in the already reserved buffer area is executed. In addition, in the setting processing for background, control termination processing is executed to delete the image data for background not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  In the subsequent step S1003, setting processing for effect is executed. In the effect setting process, among the image data designated in the current drawing list, an object for displaying the effect image is grasped. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, processing for starting arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting processing for background. If it is allocated, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control end process is executed to delete the image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  In the subsequent step S1004, setting processing for symbols is executed. In the setting process for symbols, among the image data designated in the current drawing list, an object for displaying the symbols is grasped. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, processing for starting arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting processing for background. If it is allocated, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for symbols, control end processing is executed to delete the image data for symbols not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  Execution of the processes in steps S1002 to S1004 causes the drawing list to be specified as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis as shown in FIG. The setting of the scene in which the backmost image PC1 and the various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale which are also designated by the drawing list is completed.

  Note that FIG. 17 simply shows how the rearmost image PC1 and the various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged. In the backmost image PC1, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction need not be set to the back side with respect to all the various objects PC2 to PC10. For example, the backmost image PC1 is bent or inclined By being arranged in the above, the coordinate in the Z-axis direction may be closer to the front side than some of the objects. However, the region of the backmost image PC1 in which the coordinates in the X-axis direction and the coordinates in the Y-axis direction are the same as this part of the object is all in the Z axis direction coordinates behind that object. The object is not covered by the backmost image PC1.

  In the following step S1005, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the orientation of the viewpoint are determined by the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set to the origin as the viewpoint based on the coordinates and the orientation of the viewpoint Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 17, the viewpoint PC 11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

  Here, camera information is set for each individual image (the rearmost image PC1 and various objects PC2 to PC10), and in actuality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image as described above, it is possible to individually perform viewpoint switching, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is enhanced. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 17 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  In the subsequent step S1006, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the view coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted to the view coordinate system corresponding to the view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  In the subsequent step S1007, clipping processing is performed. In the clipping process, the individual images extracted in step S1006 are grasped with the corresponding viewpoints as the common origin. Then, based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display surface G of the symbol display device 31) in that state, extraction is performed in step S1006. Clip each individual image that has been

  In the following step S1008, a writing process is performed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the information of the light designated by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

  In the subsequent step S1009, color information setting processing is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or in vertex units for each object extracted by the clipping process. In the setting process of the color information, basically, a texture mapping process of pasting a texture corresponding to each of the objects extracted by the clipping process is executed. Also, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping may be performed.

  Thereafter, in steps S1010 and S1011, each individual image extracted in step S1007 and further subjected to the lighting process and the setting process of color information is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection) Create drawing data by parallel projection.

  Specifically, first, in step S1010, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the background drawing data creation processing, background projection data is created by performing projection on the screen area PC 12 while performing hidden surface removal on the backmost image and object set as the background image.

  Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 4, and the screen buffer 144 is a buffer for background into which drawing data for background is written, drawing data for effect, and a pattern The effect and graphic buffer are set in which drawing data for writing are collectively written. Further, in the buffer for background, the buffer for effect and the pattern, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC 12 is set. The background drawing data created in step S1010 is written to the background buffer. If background image data is not specified in the drawing list, background drawing data is not created.

  In the subsequent step S1011, rendering data creation processing for effect and symbol is executed. In rendering data creation processing for effects and symbols, the screen buffer is used by performing projection on the screen area PC 12 while performing hidden surface removal on the objects set as effect images and the objects set as symbols. The rendering data for the effect and the symbol are created in the effect for the effect 144 and the buffer for the symbol. When the effect and symbol image data are not designated in the drawing list, the effect and symbol drawing data are not created.

  Thereafter, in step S1012, after the drawing data combining process is performed, the present drawing process is ended. In the drawing data combining process of step S1012, the drawing data for background and the drawing data for effect and design that are individually created in the screen buffer 144 individually by the processes of step S1010 and step S1011 are combined, and The combined result is written as drawing data of one frame in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn.

  In this case, the order of writing is specified to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for background → rendering and drawing data for symbols. Therefore, first, drawing data for background is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then drawing data for effect and design is written. At this time, the image on the back side is used as it is when the completely transparent α value is set to the pixel for which drawing is to be executed, and the α value is used when the semi-transparent α value is set. Fusion of the image on the back side and the image on the front side at the ratio used as the reference is performed, and when the alpha value of non-transmission is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side Then, operations for fusion are performed.

Here, to describe the operation for fusion in more detail, each numerical value information of RGB of each dot in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the drawing object is set to the pixel which is the drawing object in the drawing data for the effect and the symbol Based on the value of
R: "R value of back side image" × ("1"-"α value") + "R value of front side image" × "α value"
G: "G value of back side image" × ("1"-"α value") + "G value of front side image" × "α value"
B: "B value of back side image" × ("1"-"α value") + "B value of front side image" × "α value"
It becomes.

  Incidentally, each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, but an alpha value of complete transmission is set for a blank portion where projection is not performed in drawing data for effect and symbol.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec. Further, although an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data, as the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. It is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after the frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit which alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of an image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn are restricted not to be output targets for outputting an image signal.

  Steps S1002 to S1007 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S1008 to S1012 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  The Z buffer 143 is used when performing hidden surface removal by the Z buffer method as described above. Here, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer performed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The hidden surface process using the Z buffer is activated in each drawing data creation process of step S1010 and step S1011 in the drawing process (FIG. 16) when Z test specification is made in the drawing list. Further, when the Z test specification is performed, the display CPU 131 sets the Z axis of the screen area PC 12 as a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer so as to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. Pixels to be displayed are determined between pixels aligned in a direction parallel to the Z-axis direction.

  In the background drawing data creation process in step S1010, the image for the back and the background object are targets of hidden surface processing, and in the effect and the drawing data creation process in step S1011, for the rendering object and the figure Objects are subject to hidden surface processing. Further, in the hidden surface processing in rendering data creation processing for effect and symbol, an alpha value of complete transmission is set for a blank portion in which neither an object for effect nor an object for symbol is set.

  Only one Z buffer 143 is set, and it has an area with the same number of dots as the background buffer in the screen buffer 144, and has an area with the same number of dots as the presentation and pattern buffers. doing.

  First, in step S1101, on the basis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17), it is an individual image included on the Z axis and is an object pixel of the individual image to be the test target this time. Understand the set Z value. In the subsequent step S1102, the Z-buffer 143 grasps the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the drawing target dot on a one-to-one basis.

  In the following step S1103, it is determined whether the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the near side in the Z axis direction than the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S1102. If it corresponds to the front side, the process advances to step S1104 to overwrite the Z value grasped in step S1101 on the dot area referred to in step S1102 in the Z buffer 143. In the subsequent step S1105, the drawing target numerical value information such as the color information set in the pixel referred to in step S1101 is overwritten on the area of the current projection target dot in the drawing target buffer in the screen buffer 144. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that the front side is not supported, the process proceeds to step S1106 without executing the processing of steps S1104 to S1105. That is, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set to the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. In addition to this, the already set numerical information for drawing is held as it is. On the other hand, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the near side in the Z axis direction with respect to the Z value already set to the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. The numerical information for drawing is also updated.

  In step S1106, it is determined whether the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S1101 to perform a Z test on a new target pixel.

  If it has been completed, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the Z test has been completed for all the dots in the screen area PC12. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S1108, and then the process returns to step S1101 to perform a Z test on a new projection target dot. If it has been completed, this hidden surface processing is ended.

  By performing hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z axis, only the individual image closer to the viewpoint is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, a mask (that is, a partial display) of a character for background is executed using the hidden surface process. Then, this mask is performed by setting the Z value of the object in the display CPU 131 for the mask.

  Hereinafter, the mask calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, when the arithmetic processing for the mask indicates that the arithmetic processing for the mask is to be performed in the area referred to in the data table, the arithmetic processing for the background in step S 903 in the task processing (FIG. 14) is performed. Is executed.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the current processing cycle corresponds to the first mask display. Here, a first mask display and a second mask display are set as the mask display. The first mask display is a display mode in which the state in which the character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is a plurality of frames in which pixels masked from the state in which the entire character is displayed The display mode is to gradually increase and eventually disappear.

  If it corresponds to the first mask display, in step S1202, an object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1203, based on the currently set data table, pixels to be masked in the object grasped in step S1202 are grasped.

  Thereafter, after the Z value setting process is performed in step S 1204, the present arithmetic process ends. In the process of setting the Z value, the Z value is set to be behind the image on the backmost side for the pixels that are to be masked in the object, and the pixels that are not to be masked are The Z value is set so as to correspond to the position which is on the front side of the rearmost image and should be displayed.

  As described above, the mask processing process is executed, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as the drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, and the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer as the hidden surface processing. Hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) is performed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display surface G. The specific content of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 20, a three-dimensional image is shown as a two-dimensional image.

  FIG. 20A shows the case where the character CH1 is displayed as usual without performing the first mask display. FIG. 20 (a-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated in the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. 20 (a-2) is a view on the display surface G. The display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20 (a-1), as shown in FIG. 20 (a-2), the Z value is set in each pixel so as to be on the front side of the image on the backmost side. The character CH1 is displayed in its entirety.

  FIG. 20B shows the case where the first mask display is performed. FIG. 20 (b-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. 20 (b-2) is a view on the display surface G. The display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20 (b-1), the Z value is set to a part of each pixel so as to be on the front side of the image on the backmost side, but The Z value is set to be behind the image of. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20 (b-2), only the portion corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set so that the character CH1 is on the front side is displayed.

  Note that a plurality of types of Z-value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH1 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, a plurality of types of first mask display modes can be set for the same character CH1.

  Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for the mask (FIG. 19), if it is determined in step S1201 that the current processing count does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing count is the second mask. Since this corresponds to the display, the process advances to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the start timing of the second mask display.

  If it is the start timing, in step S1206, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S1207, a mask dedicated table is read out based on the currently set data table. The mask dedicated table is stored and held until the current second mask display is completed. In the following step S1208, the pixels set as the initial erase target in the mask dedicated table are grasped.

  After that, the Z value setting process is performed in step S1209, and then the arithmetic process ends. In the setting process of the Z value, in the above object, with respect to the pixels grasped as the initial deletion target in step S1208, the Z value is set to be behind the image on the rearmost side, For pixels that are not, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position that is to the front of the rearmost image and should be displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1205 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, the deletion target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In the following step S1211, data corresponding to the value of the deletion target counter updated in step S1210 is confirmed in the mask dedicated table currently read out, and the pixel to be deleted is grasped.

  Thereafter, after the Z value setting process is performed in step S1212, the present arithmetic process ends. In the setting process of the Z value, in the above object, the Z value is set to be behind the image on the rearmost side with respect to the pixels grasped as the deletion target in step S1211, and is the deletion target. For non-pixels, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be displayed on the front side of the image on the backmost side.

  As described above, the mask processing process is executed, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as the drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, and the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer as the hidden surface processing. Hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) is performed, and finally a second mask display is performed on the display surface G. The specific content of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 21, a three-dimensional image is shown as a two-dimensional image.

  FIG. 21 (a) shows an image of information set in the mask dedicated table, and FIG. 21 (b) shows the case where the character CH2 is displayed as usual without the second mask display being performed. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the object PC 14 corresponding to the character CH2 has a plurality of pixels, and in the mask dedicated table, the plurality of pixels are divided into a plurality and grouped together. A frame order to be deleted is set for that. Specifically, a group shown as "a1" is set as an initial deletion target, and thereafter, a group shown as "a2" → a group shown as "a3" → a group shown as "a4" → shown as "a5" It becomes an elimination target in the order of the group.

  In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated as "a1" is to be erased, the pixel portion corresponding to the group "a1" is missing as shown in FIG. 21 (c). The character CH2 is displayed. Also, in the subsequent frame, when the group indicated as "a2" is to be deleted, pixels corresponding to the group "a2" are added to the group "a1" as shown in FIG. 21 (d). The character CH2 is displayed with the part missing. Then, the character CH2 is not displayed in the frame in which the group indicated as "a5" is finally targeted for deletion.

  As described above, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask an object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform mask calculation on the program of the display CPU 131, and there is no need to set mask data, which is a kind of image data, in the VDP 135. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required to store image data.

  Further, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131 so much. In addition, a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display can exhibit the above-described excellent effects.

  In addition, the Z value on the back side of the backmost image is set to the non-displayed portion. Since the backmost image is an image that always constitutes the back in any frame, it becomes an absolute reference as the position of the Z axis (in the depth direction). By setting the Z value of the portion to be non-displayed based on this, it becomes possible to make the setting mode of the Z value in the non-display case uniform, and processing related to the setting of the Z value Can reduce the processing load of

  Note that only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. In addition, the configuration may be such that the second mask display is not erased for every plurality of pixels, but may be erased for each pixel, and a pixel that has become an erasure target may be set again as a display target It may be

  Also, by performing the setting of the Z value in reverse, the characters are not sequentially erased over the display period of a plurality of frames, but displayed so that the characters appear sequentially over the display periods of a plurality of frames. It may be configured as

<Another form of mask processing using Z buffer 143>
Another form of mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing another mode of mask arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131.

  First, in step S1301, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether it is the start timing. If it is the start timing, in step S1302, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1303, based on the currently set data table, the initial process is performed. Read the mask table.

  In the following step S1304, a mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read out, and information of an erasure target corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S1303. .

  The lottery counter is configured to be updated, for example, every time the process of step S702 is executed in the main process (FIG. 12), and further, when the counter value makes one revolution, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be Further, in the initial mask table, information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counters, and the information to be erased is all pixels constituting the object to be masked. The plurality of pixels in one group corresponds to each group on a one-to-one basis.

  In the subsequent step S1305, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S1304. After that, the Z value setting process is performed in step S1306, and this arithmetic process ends. In this Z value setting process, in the object described above, the Z value is set to be behind the image on the backmost side for the pixels grasped as the erasure target in step S1305, and is the erasure target. For non-pixels, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be displayed on the front side of the image on the backmost side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1301 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, the mask table is rewritten so that the information to be erased that has already been set as the erasure target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set to be erased is rewritten so as to be redundantly assigned to the other information to be erased. This assignment may be performed randomly, or may be assigned to the information to be deleted corresponding to the immediately lower counter value on the table.

  Thereafter, the processing in steps S1304 to S1306 is performed using the mask table rewritten in step S1307, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, according to the present alternative embodiment, since pixels to be erased are randomly selected, the aspect of mask display can be diversified.

  The mask display using the Z buffer 143 may be applied not to the background character but to the effect character or pattern. For example, in the case of applying to a character for effect, the hidden surface process is collectively performed on the image data for background and the image data for effect, so that the rearmost surface is the same as the above configuration. The distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be performed based on the Z value of the image. In addition, in the case of applying to a symbol, the hidden surface processing is performed collectively on the image data for background, the image data for effect, and the image data for symbol in the same manner as the above configuration. The distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be performed on the basis of the Z value of the backmost image.

  In addition, even if hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, effects, and patterns, it is determined that pixels for which the Z value on the back side is set in VDP 135 are not to be drawn in VDP 135. If it is, similarly to the above configuration, the distribution of the Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be performed based on the Z value of the backmost image.

  Further, the distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target is not performed on the basis of the Z value of the backmost image, for example, the Z value of the front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target. The Z value on the rear side of the viewpoint may be set as the Z value of the display target.

  The hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not based on the Z axis of the world coordinate system but based on the direction in which the viewpoint is directed.

<Configuration for Switching Display Mode>
Next, the configuration relating to the switching of the display mode will be described.

  In the display mode, as described above, the standby image displayed before the game turn is started, and the state in which the kind of the game turn image displayed in the situation where the game turn is being executed is determined as a predetermined type. And a plurality of display modes are set. Specifically, the first display mode and the second display mode are set.

  In the first display mode and the second display mode, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of each pattern are different from each other. Specifically, when comparing the symbols assigned the same number, the outer shape and the shape of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and the patterns are different. As for the background image, the type of the backmost image is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and type of characters displayed before the backmost image are also different. The number of characters displayed is set to be larger in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

  The switching of the display mode is performed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. Specifically, the display mode is sequentially switched by operating the operation device for effect 48 in a situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. In addition, the game operation is switched based on that the operation device for effect 48 is operated under predetermined conditions in a situation where the game is being executed.

  A specific processing configuration relating to switching of the display mode will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing operation generation command handling processing executed by the display CPU 131. The operation generation command corresponding process is executed in the command corresponding process of step S 803 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 13).

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether an operation generation command for mode switching has been received from the sound emission control device 60 or not. If it has not been received, this operation command corresponding process is ended as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, it is determined whether or not it is a first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game play nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether it is the first switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1402, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is the first switchable period, in step S1403, a first switch execution flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the process proceeds to step S1404 to determine whether it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in a situation where the game play is being executed. Specifically, when the game display effect is executed in the symbol display device 31, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is started → the high speed variation display in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 → the low velocity fluctuation The flow of the display of sequentially stopping each symbol row SA1 to SA3 via the display is included. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from when variation display of symbols in all symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is started and high-speed variation display in all symbol rows SA1 to SA3 ends.

  In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the symbols starts the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 → The acceleration period of all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 → the high speed fluctuation display in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 (high speed is constant It may be a flow of display such as sequential stop of each symbol row SA1 to SA3 via low speed fluctuation display (low speed is constant speed). In this case, the second switchable period may be a period in which high-speed variation display in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is being performed.

  In addition, medium speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. That is, if the aspect of the variation display of symbols is switched in a plurality of stages such as two stages, three stages, or four or more stages, the specific number of stages is arbitrary. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of low identification stages in which the player has low in the identification of the symbol.

  In addition, if the flow of the fluctuation display of the symbol includes the state of the fluctuation display in the relatively low identification mode → the fluctuation display in the high identification aspect, the specific fluctuation aspect is arbitrary, for example, any aspect. Even though the fluctuation speed is the same, in the low discrimination mode, the symbol is displayed transparent, semi-transparent, hollow or partially removed, and in the high discrimination mode, the whole symbol is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period in which the variable display in the low identification mode is performed.

  Information for specifying whether it is the second switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1404, it is determined whether it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is determined that it is not the second switchable period, the present operation generation command correspondence processing is ended as it is, and if it is the second switchable period, the predetermined area provided in work RAM 132 in step S1405. And the second switching execution flag is set.

  After one of the processes in step S1403 and step S1405 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, the display mode counter is updated.

  The display mode counter is a counter for specifying the current display mode by the display CPU 131, and is provided in the work RAM 132. In the counters for the display mode, counter values are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set as the display modes as described above, the numerical value of "0" corresponding to the first display mode as the counter value and the second display The numerical value of "1" corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the display mode counter is set to “0”, the operation power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, or the pachinko machine 10 is reset. 1 Display mode is set.

  In step S1406, the display mode counter is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order each time the effect operating device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the processing in step S1406 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is "0" and the first display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to "1" and the second When the processing in step S1406 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is “1” and the second display mode is set while switching to the display mode, the display mode counter is set to “1”. 1 Switch to the display mode. After the process of step S1406 is performed, the operation occurrence command handling process is finished.

  Next, arithmetic processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The calculation processing for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation processing in step S 903 in the task processing (FIG. 14). In addition, since the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed when executing the jackpot effect, etc., the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is not performed, and the standby image is displayed or the game circulation effect is performed. The arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed, for example.

  First, in step S1501, the display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132 is referenced to determine whether or not the first display mode is set. In the case of the first display mode, in step S1502, the first backmost image to be updated at this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1503, various control parameters of the first rear-face image thus grasped are calculated to update control information. In the following step S1504, based on the currently set data table, an object corresponding to the first display mode and an object to be updated for background is grasped. In the subsequent step S1505, various control parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

  On the other hand, in the case of the second display mode, in step S1506, the second backmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S1507, various parameters of the second rearmost image thus grasped are calculated to update control information. In the following step S1508, based on the currently set data table, an object corresponding to the second display mode and an object to be updated for background is grasped. In the following step S1509, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

  Note that, at the execution timing of the process of step S1502, the setting process (step S901) for control start of the background object corresponding to the first backmost image and the first display mode is completed. Further, at the execution timing of the process of step S1506, the setting process (step S901) for control start on the background object corresponding to the second backmost image and the second display mode is completed.

  After executing the processing of step S1505 or step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not any one of the first switching execution flag and the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If one of the switching execution flags is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the processing load is large.

  When the processing load is large, the processing load of VDP 135 is large enough to cause processing omission when both of the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the current drawing list are executed by VDP 135 or processing This refers to a situation where the processing load of VDP 135 is relatively large even if a drop does not occur. Information on whether the processing load is large or not is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1511 is performed based on the information.

  If the processing load is not large, it is determined in step S1512 whether the background image corresponding to the current display mode has already been stored separately. Here, separate storage is to save separately the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode and to maintain the stored state. For separate storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 4).

  A mode buffer 145 displays a first mode area 145a in which background drawing data for displaying a background image corresponding to the first display mode is written, and a background image corresponding to the second display mode. And a second mode area 145b in which drawing data for background is written. The VDP 135 also has a function of writing background drawing data to either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and reads the background drawing data that has been written to the screen buffer 144. And a display mode control unit 154 having a writing function.

  If it is not saved separately, the execution designation information of the separately saved is stored in step S1513, and then the present computation processing is ended. If it is saved separately, the present computation processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, when the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing is for the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The information of usage instruction of the image data is set. When the process of step S1513 is being executed, execution specification information of another storage is set. The execution specification information of the separate storage includes information indicating that the separate storage should be performed, and also includes information of the address of the separate storage destination.

  On the other hand, if the processing load is large (step S1511: YES), it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the background image of the display mode of the switching destination has been saved separately. If the data has not been separately stored, the present arithmetic processing ends. On the other hand, if it has already been stored separately, the use specification information of the separately stored data is stored in step S1515, and then this arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing is for the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The information of usage instruction of the image data is set. In addition, when the process of step S1515 is executed, use specification information of another storage data is set. The usage specification information of the separately stored data includes information indicating that the separately stored data should be used, and also includes information of an address at which the separately stored data is stored.

  Next, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S905 of the task process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1601, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is necessary to execute processing for control update on a symbol. The case where it is not necessary to execute includes the case where the jackpot effect is being executed, and the case where it is necessary to be executed includes the case where the effect for the game circulation is being executed and the case where the standby image is displayed. If it is not necessary to execute, the symbol processing process is ended as it is, and if it is necessary to execute, whether or not the game is being executed based on the currently set data table in step S1602. It is determined whether or not.

  If the game is not being executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If the first switching execution flag is set, the symbol to be controlled is changed in step S1604 in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, while holding information on parameters of each free buffer area secured in control of symbols in the work RAM 132 as it is, information of symbols to be controlled (for example, information of stored address) Is rewritten to the information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. The processes of step S1603 and step S1604 may be executed in the setting process (step S901) for control start in the task process (FIG. 14). In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1603 or if the process of step S1604 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, an object of a symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1606, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the present symbol calculation processing ends.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is image data for a pattern corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Information of usage instruction of is set.

  If the game is being executed (step S1602: YES), whether or not high-speed variation display is in progress in all symbol rows SA1 to SA3 based on the currently set data table in step S1607 judge. If high-speed change display is in progress in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, it is determined in step S1608 whether the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132 or not.

  If the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. In the case where the drawing process (FIG. 16) corresponding to the drawing list of this time is executed by the VDP 135, if the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination, processing omission occurs. It is possible to change if processing omission does not occur on the basis of whether or not it is determined that it is impossible to change if processing omission occurs.

  For example, when background image data corresponding to switching of the display mode is newly set in the drawing list this time, the VDP 135 needs to newly set the image data to the world coordinate system. The processing load of VDP 135 is increased. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol can not be changed. On the other hand, when separately stored data is set as image data for background in the current drawing list, or when image data for background corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode according to the previous drawing list is set Since there is no need to newly set the setting of image data to the world coordinate system in the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 is relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol can be changed.

  Note that information on whether or not it is possible to change is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1609 is performed based on the information. In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, the second switching execution flag is cleared.

  If it is determined in step S1609 that the symbol can be changed, in step S1610, the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. The specific content of this process is the same as in step S1604. After the process of step S1610 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1613.

  If it is determined in step S1609 that the change is not possible, then in step S1611, the change standby flag is set for a predetermined area provided in work RAM 132, and the process proceeds to step S1613. . The change waiting flag is a flag for specifying that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting on the display CPU 131. When the change waiting flag is set, even if it is determined in step S1608 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S1609 is performed by executing the process of step S1612. To be executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change waiting flag are not set, the process directly proceeds to step S1613. Also, the change standby flag is cleared when an affirmative determination is made in step S1612.

  In step S 1613, an object of a symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the subsequent step S 1614, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the present symbol calculation processing ends.

  As described above, when the symbol operation process is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes instructions for using image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode. Information is set. In this case, when it is determined in step S1609 that the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination can not be changed, the information of the use instruction of the image data of the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching source is as it is Set in the drawing list. Then, a symbol not corresponding to the display mode is finally displayed on the display surface G. However, since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is under high-speed fluctuation display, the player can not change the above state. Unrecognized or hard to recognize.

  Moreover, when it is not possible to change to a symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the change standby flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing. As a result, the display mode can be properly switched while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 135. In addition, the processing load of VDP135 is adjusted so that the change of the symbol corresponding to the display mode of a switching destination is performed in the range in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed.

  If the high-speed change display is not in progress (step S1607: NO), the process proceeds to step S1615. In step S1615, an object of a symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the subsequent step S1616, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the present symbol calculation processing ends. As described above, when the symbol operation process is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes instructions for using image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode. Information is set.

  Next, background setting processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for background is executed in step S1002 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether use specification of another storage data is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S1702, the register 153 stores information for setting another storage data corresponding to the specification as the drawing data for the background.

  If it is not set (step S1701: NO) or after the process of step S1702 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, the backmost image designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1704, various parameters designated about the backmost image are grasped. Thereafter, in step S1705, processing for setting the world coordinate system is performed on the backmost image. The contents of this setting are as described above.

  In the following step S1706, an object for background designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1707, various parameters designated about the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S1708, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and the setting process for the background is ended.

  By the background setting process being executed as described above, drawing is performed not only in the case where the use specification of separately stored data is not set, but also in the situation where the use specification of separately stored data is set The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Then, along with this, for example, when the current drawing list relates to the switching of the display mode, it is possible to perform setting for starting control of image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination.

  Next, a background drawing data creation process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background drawing data creation process is executed in step S1010 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether the information of use setting of another storage data is set in the register 153 or not. If it is not set, hidden surface processing is executed in step S1802 to create background drawing data in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface processing is as described above.

  In the following step S1803, it is determined whether an execution specification of separate storage is set in the current drawing list. If the setting is not made, the present drawing data creation processing is ended as it is. If it is set, in step S1804, the background area created in step S1802 is set to the target mode area out of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Write the drawing data of. Thereby, separate storage of drawing data for background is performed. Thereafter, the drawing data creation process is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S1801, when the information of the use setting of another storage data is set in the register 153, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, another storage data is read from the mode area designated at this time, and the read other storage data is read. The screen buffer 144 is written as drawing data for the background. Thereafter, the drawing data creation process is ended.

  The background drawing data creation processing is executed as described above, whereby the background drawing data for geometry calculation and rendering, or the background drawing data related to another storage data is stored in the screen buffer 144. . Further, in a frame in which an image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, rendering data creation processing for effects and symbols (step S1011) is subsequently performed to create rendering data for effects and symbols, The drawing data combining process (step S1012) is executed to create drawing data for one frame.

  Here, the timing at which the separate storage data for the first display mode and the separate storage data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 28A shows background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 28B shows background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode. Also, FIG. 28 (a) shows the power ON / OFF state of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 28 (b) shows the presence or absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 28 (c) shows the presence or absence of the second display mode. FIG. 28 (d) shows the presence or absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 28 (e) shows the presence or absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

  As the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, the power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the processing is started by the display CPU 131. Further, since the display mode is set to the first display mode, the display CPU 131 outputs the drawing list to the VDP 135 to display an image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing later than the timing of t1. Further, generation of drawing data corresponding to the first display mode is started in the VDP 135 based on the drawing list.

  Thereafter, at time t2, when the creation of the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode is completed, the drawing data is used as another storage data for the first display mode in the first mode of the mode buffer 145. Are stored in the memory area 145a. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. 28A, three-dimensional characters indicated by “A” to “F” in front of the rearmost image. The image is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. Further, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started at the timing of t2 or at a predetermined timing thereafter.

  Thereafter, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the operation device for effect 48 being operated at the timing of t3. Then, drawing data for the second display mode is created, and display of an image corresponding to the second display mode is started. In addition, since the creation of background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode is completed at this timing, the drawing data serves as another storage data for the second display mode and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Is stored in In the background image based on the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 28B, three-dimensional characters indicated by "G" to "J" in front of the rearmost image. The image is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the second mode area 145 b is stored while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

  Here, the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode has more objects to be set than the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode. Then, if switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur in the VDP 135. On the other hand, the processing load is large by creating separately stored data for the first display mode among the stored data separately for both using time when initial setting at power on is performed. In the situation where the display mode is switched to the first display mode, it is possible to use the other stored data to avoid processing omission.

  On the other hand, the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode has a small processing load on the VDP 135 for its creation, and even if switching to the second display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large, It is set so that processing omission does not occur. However, the background display data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode is also stored separately, and switching to the second display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load is relatively large even if processing omission does not occur. , The other stored data is used.

  As described above, as shown by the timing of t4 to t9, when the switching of the display mode is repeatedly performed in a short time by the separate storage data being created, the other storage data is displayed in each display mode. By using the background image to display, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omission.

  Further, the target of separate storage is a background image, and does not include an individual image in which a change such as a pattern is noted. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is changing, the movement of the individual image for which the change is noted continues even if the image is displayed using another stored data. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable.

  The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set to three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, the display mode can be switched favorably by separately storing background drawing data corresponding to each display mode.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure performed without the switch of the kind of symbol being carried out waiting, regardless of the switch timing of a display mode. Further, the symbols may be configured not to differ between the display modes.

  Also, the effect character may be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the effect character may not be stored separately, or may be stored separately.

<Configuration for Displaying 3D Image Using Connected Object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image using a connected object will be described.

  A linked object is a single unit object in which a plurality of component objects (partial objects) are linked with joints as joints, and to move characters in a three-dimensional image by relatively displacing each component object It is set. By using the connected object, the character of the three-dimensional image can be moved smoothly. In view of the fact that the connected object has a skeleton and joints, it can also be called a bone model.

  The connected object is set to display a character that performs a predetermined action. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of linked objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, in order to display a common character, a first connected object PC15 and a second connected object PC16 are set. Each of the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 has a plurality of connected parts CT1 and CT2, but the connected parts CT1 and CT2 are set at mutually different places.

  Specifically, although the first connected object PC 15 is not provided with a connecting portion at the knee portion, a connecting portion CT1 is provided at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 29 (a-1) and (a-2). It is possible to display the operation as shown. On the other hand, the second connected object PC16 is not provided with the connecting part at the elbow part, but the connecting part CT2 is provided at the knee part, as shown in FIGS. 29 (b-1) and (b-2). It is possible to display the operation. As described above, by setting the connecting parts at different places, it is possible to make the character perform different operations depending on the case where the first connected object PC 15 is used and the case where the second connected object PC 16 is used. It becomes.

  Although both connected objects PC15 and PC16 have the connecting parts CT1 and CT2 in the common part, they may be configured not to have the connecting parts CT1 and CT2 in the common part. Also, although a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, a texture may be individually set. If it is possible to cause the character to perform different operations by preparing a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16, the positions of the connecting parts CT1 and CT2 and the type of the character are arbitrary.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying a state in which the character is moving using both of the connected objects PC15 and PC16 will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing operation processing for a connected object executed by the display CPU 131. Arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed in the effect arithmetic processing in step S904 of task processing (FIG. 14). In addition, the operation process for the connected object is activated when the data table corresponding to the game time in which the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is executed is set.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not rendering using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is being performed (the above character is being displayed). If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not it is time to start an effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16. If it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing ends, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, the start designation information of the connected object effect is stored, and in the subsequent step S1904, based on the currently set data table, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as control targets. Do. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S1904, in the setting process for control start immediately before (step S901), the process for control start is completed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16. Further, information for control of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 for which control has been started is stored in the work RAM 132 until the present series of effects using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 are completed.

  In the subsequent step S1905, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated, and control information related to the first connected object PC15 is updated. In step S1906, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated, and control information related to the second connected object PC16 is updated.

  In the subsequent step S1907, designation information of the first effect period is stored. Here, in the effects using the connected objects PC15 and PC16, the entire effect period is divided into a plurality of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. Then, the character is displayed using the first connected object PC 15 in the first effect period and the third effect period, and the character is displayed using the second connected object PC 16 in the second effect period. After that, in step S1908, the parameters of the first connected object PC15 of the both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set to be specified in the current drawing list.

  In the subsequent step S1909, based on the currently set data table, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the first effect period, is grasped. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S1909, in the setting process for the control start immediately before (step S901), the process for the control start is completed for the object to be updated this time. Thereafter, in step S1910, various parameters of the above-identified other objects are calculated, and control information related to these other objects is updated, after which the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed, information on usage instructions for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set to the objects PC15 and PC16. In addition, start specification information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connection objects PC 15 and PC 16 should be started, and specification information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period are set in the drawing list. Be done.

  On the other hand, if the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (step S1901: YES), is it in the first effect period based on the data table currently set in step S1911? It is determined whether or not. If it is during the first effect period, the processing of steps S1904 to S1910 is performed, and then this arithmetic processing ends. By the way, since this time during the first effect period, the first connected object PC 15 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 29A) as the first effect period progresses. In step S1905, calculation of parameters is performed.

  As described above, when arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed, information on usage instructions for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set to the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, designation information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S1911 that the first effect period is not in progress, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not the second effect period is in progress based on the currently set data table. If it is in the second effect period, in step S1913, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

  In the subsequent step S1914, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated, and control information related to the first connected object PC15 is updated. In step S1915, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated, and control information related to the second connected object PC16 is updated. By the way, this time during the second effect period, the second connected object PC 16 performs a predetermined second operation (see FIG. 29B) as the second effect period progresses. In step S1915, calculation of parameters is performed.

  In the subsequent step S1916, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S1917, the parameter of the second connected object PC16 of the both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is specified in the current drawing list. Set

  In the subsequent step S1918, based on the currently set data table, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the second effect period, is grasped. Here, the second effect period is a state in which the effect has developed more than the first effect period, and the number of objects displayed when switching from at least the first effect period to the second effect period increases. The setting process (step S901) for the control start with respect to the increased object at the time of switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1918. Thereafter, in step S1919, various parameters of the above-identified other objects are calculated, and control information related to these other objects is updated, and then this arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed, information on usage instructions for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and The parameters of the second connected object PC16 are set to the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, designation information of a second effect period indicating that it is a second effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S1912 that the second effect period is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1920 to indicate that it is the third effect period. In step S1920, the first connected object PC 15 and the second connected object PC 16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In the subsequent step S1921, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated, and control information related to the first connected object PC15 is updated. By the way, since this time is during the third effect period, the first connected object PC 15 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 29A) as the third effect period progresses. In step S1921, the parameter calculation is performed. In step S1922, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated, and control information related to the second connected object PC16 is updated.

  In the subsequent step S1923, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and in step S1924, the parameter of the first connected object PC15 of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is specified in the current drawing list. Set

  In the subsequent step S1925, based on the currently set data table, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the third effect period, is grasped. Here, the third effect period is a state in which the effect has developed more than the second effect period, and the number of objects displayed when switching from at least the second effect period to the third effect period is increased. The setting process (step S901) for the control start on the object that has increased during switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1925. Thereafter, in step S1926, various parameters of the above-identified other objects are calculated, and control information related to these other objects is updated, after which the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed, information on usage instructions for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set to the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, designation information of a third effect period indicating that it is a third effect period is set in the drawing list.

  Next, the setting process for linked object effect performed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for connected object effect is executed in the setting process for effect in step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the setting process for connected object effect is activated when any one of the start instruction of the connected object effect and the specification of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether start designation of connected object effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2002, the memory module 133 recognizes the address at which the first connected object PC 15 is stored based on the current drawing list, and sets the first connected object PC 15 in question. read out. In step S2003, the memory module 133 recognizes the address at which the second connected object PC 16 is stored based on the current drawing list, and reads the second connected object PC16.

  In the subsequent step S2004, setting processing of the uniform α value for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC 15 is set to “1” which is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC 16 is set to “0” which is the completely transparent information Do. As a result, while color information (including information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) which is set in advance is applied to all pixels of the first connected object PC 15 as it is, The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of two connected objects PC 16.

  In the subsequent step S2005, the parameter designated for the first connected object PC15 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16. Thereafter, in step S2006, processing for setting the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

  Since it is the processing time which concerns on the start specification of a connection object production this time, arrangement | positioning to the world coordinate system of both connection objects PC15 and PC16 is performed. Further, although the shapes of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 substantially match, the connected part of each part object is different. Then, even if the parameter of the first connected object PC15 is applied as it is to the second connected object PC16, pixels for which the coordinate designations do not match are generated, but for such pixels, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side .

  In the subsequent step S2007, while grasping other objects for the first effect period designated in the current drawing list, in step S2008, various parameters designated about the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S2009, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and the setting process for the present connected object effect is ended.

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the arrangement of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is simultaneously started with respect to the world coordinate system. Further, since the same parameter is applied to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are arranged overlapping on the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the second connected object PC16 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering because the process of step S2004 is executed, the first connected object of the both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is displayed on the display surface G. Only the PC 15 is displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2001 that the start designation of the linked object effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether designation of the first effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If the setting has been made, the processing of steps S2004 to S2009 is performed, and then the setting processing ends. In this case, in step S2006, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from information of parameters set corresponding to the first connected object PC15 in the drawing list. Update.

  By executing the setting process for linked object effect as described above, various parameters of both linked objects PC 15 and PC 16 are updated, but the process of step S 2004 is executed. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first connected object PC15 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2005 corresponds to the first connected object PC 15, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display surface G as the first effect period progresses. The object PC 15 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2010 that designation of the first effect period is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether designation of the second effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If it is set, in step S2012, a process of setting a uniform α value for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC 15 is set to “0” which is complete transparency information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC 16 is set to “1” which is opaque information Do. As a result, color information (including information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) which is set in advance is applied as it is to all pixels of the second connected object PC16. The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of “1” connected object PC 15.

  In the subsequent step S2013, the parameters specified for the second connected object PC16 in the current drawing list are grasped as parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16. Thereafter, in step S2014, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

  Since this time is processing for updating the second effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set corresponding to the second connected object PC16 in the drawing list. Understand and update from the parameter information. In this case, the shapes of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 substantially match, but the connected parts of the respective part objects are different. Then, even if the parameter of the second connected object PC16 is applied as it is to the first connected object PC15, pixels for which the coordinate designations do not match are generated, but for such pixels, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side .

  In the following step S2015, while grasping other objects for the second effect period designated in the current drawing list, in step S2016, various parameters designated about the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S2017, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and the setting process for the present connected object effect is ended. Here, if the current processing time is the timing for switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of objects to be displayed is increased, so the process according to that is executed in step S2017. .

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated, but the process of step S2012 is performed. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the second connected object PC16 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S2013 corresponds to the second connected object PC 16, the second connection is performed so that the second operation is performed on the display surface G as the second effect period progresses. The object PC 16 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2011 that the specification of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, this means that the specification of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list, The process advances to step S2018.

  In step S2018, setting processing of a uniform α value for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC 15 is set to “1” which is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC 16 is set to “0” which is the completely transparent information Do. As a result, while color information (including information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) which is set in advance is applied to all pixels of the first connected object PC 15 as it is, The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of two connected objects PC 16.

  In the subsequent step S2019, the parameter designated for the first connected object PC15 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16. Thereafter, in step S2020, processing for setting the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

  Since this time is processing for updating the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set corresponding to the first connected object PC15 in the drawing list. Understand and update from the parameter information.

  In the following step S2021, while grasping other objects for the third effect period designated in the current drawing list, in step S2022, various parameters designated about the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S2023, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and the setting process for the present connected object effect is ended. Here, when the current processing time is a timing related to switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of objects to be displayed is increased, and accordingly, processing corresponding to that is executed in step S2023. .

  By executing the setting process for linked object effect as described above, various parameters of both linked objects PC 15 and PC 16 are updated, but the process of step S 2018 is executed. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first connected object PC15 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2019 corresponds to the first connected object PC 15, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display surface G with the progress of the third effect period. The object PC 15 is displayed.

  Next, the contents of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view for explaining a connected object effect. Further, FIG. 32 (a) shows a first effect period, FIG. 32 (b) shows a second effect period, and FIG. 32 (c) shows a third effect period. 32 (a-1), (b-1) and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 32 (a-2), (b-2) and (c-2) are images of the world coordinate system. The display surface G is shown. Moreover, although a background image and a pattern are abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 32 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), a background image is actually displayed on the back side of the image for each production At the same time, the symbol is displayed on the near side.

  In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but a transparentizing process is performed on the second connected object PC16. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first operation is performed with the progress of the first effect period. . In addition, characters CH4 to CH6 shown in "A" to "C" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

  In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (b-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparency processing is performed on the first connected object PC15. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (b-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the second connected object PC16 is displayed on the display surface G, and the second operation is performed with the progress of the second effect period. .

  Here, when FIG. 32 (a-2) and FIG. 32 (b-2) are compared, it is shown that both characters CH3 have different shapes, but actually both connected objects PC15, The same texture is mapped to the PC 16 to make the connection (joint part) inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same or similar images are displayed on the display surface G with respect to the character CH3, and the player has difficulty in recognizing the switch. . However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

  In addition, in the second effect period, characters CH4 to CH8 shown in "A" to "E" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH4 to CH8 is greater than in the first effect period.

  In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (c-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparentizing process is performed on the second connected object PC16. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (c-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first operation is performed with the progress of the third effect period. . Further, in the third effect period, characters CH4 to CH10 indicated by "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to the other objects. The number of characters CH4 to CH10 is greater than in the second effect period.

  As described above, by setting the plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 for the common character, it is possible to switch between the connected objects PC15 and PC16 to be displayed according to the type of operation using the joint part. . For example, when performing a plurality of types of operations in a single connected object, it is necessary to set an amount of connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity which can be stored as a single image data in the memory module 133 may be exceeded. There is concern that the processing time and transfer time in the On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In addition, at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many opportunities for correction of the effect, and if the entire movement of the connected object is reviewed each time the character movement is corrected, it takes a long time to design. turn into. On the other hand, by setting the plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to correct the effect, the already-created connected object PC15 , There is no need to modify all of the PCs 16. Therefore, while enabling the design of the pachinko machine 10 to be performed well, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object is controlled by the display CPU 131 prior to the timing when the linked object is switched to display a character, and is arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135 Targeted. Thereby, when the switching timing comes, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start process on the switching destination object, but execute the control update process whose processing load is smaller than that of the control start process. The processing load at the switching timing is reduced because it is good.

  In particular, at the switching timing, the effect develops and the number of objects displayed increases, so the processing load on the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 becomes relatively large. In this case, assuming that the control start process is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the display CPU 131 or VDP 135. However, as described above, the control updating process is performed on the switching destination object. Since the process can be performed, the occurrence of the process omission can be prevented.

  In addition, since both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between complete transmission information and non-transmission information, the display CPU 131 uniformly changes the α value It suffices to specify switching, and the VDP 135 may switch the uniform α value to be applied according to the specification. Therefore, the above excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

  Further, only the parameter information for the connected object to be displayed among the connected objects PC15 and PC16 simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system is provided from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135. This reduces the amount of data set in the drawing list. Further, in the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 can be reduced because the parameters of both connected objects PC 15 and PC 16 may be updated in the same manner.

  In the switching of the first effect period to the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the motion of the effect character different from the character for which the plurality of connected objects are prepared is It may be configured to be newly added, or may be configured to start displaying a character for presentation with a large processing load separately from the character for which the plurality of connected objects are prepared.

  Further, the control start timing in the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 16 and the control start timing in the VDP 135 may not be the same as the first connected object PC 15. For example, the timing may be before the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period, but after the control start timing of the first connected object PC 15.

  In addition, although the processing load at the switching timing of the rendering period increases more than the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 16 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are not simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, it is not necessary to adjust the α value uniformly and switch the display object.

  In addition, with respect to both connected objects PC15 and PC16 simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, switching of display objects may be performed by switching of rendering objects, instead of uniformly adjusting the α value. In this case, since the connected object not to be displayed is not rendered, the processing load at the time of rendering is reduced compared to the above configuration.

  In addition, the third effect period may be incomplete, or the effect period of the fourth effect period or more may be set. Further, three or more connected objects may be prepared for one character.

<Configuration for performing particle dispersion effect>
Next, a configuration for performing particle dispersion rendition will be described.

  The particle dispersion effect is an effect in which a large number of particle single images are displayed as if they are dispersed over a plurality of continuous frames (a plurality of image update timings). At the time of this dispersion, at least a part of the images of a large number of particle single images are displayed so as to be displaced by different trajectories. In the particle dispersion rendition, it is set in correspondence with the object for particle dispersion having a large number of vertex data set in one-to-one correspondence with a large number of particle single images and the object for particle dispersion, and each vertex A particle dispersion texture having a large number of single image data for displaying a single particle image respectively corresponding to a position corresponding to data is used.

  The object for particle dispersion and the texture for particle dispersion will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b). FIG. 33 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the particle dispersion object PC 17, and FIG. 33 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the particle dispersion texture PC 18. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, the particle dispersion object PC 17 includes vertex data, coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data, and other data other than these. Vertex data are set in large numbers such as vertex (1), vertex (2), vertex (3), ..., vertex (99), vertex (100), and in VDP 135, an object for particle dispersion using these vertex data Each vertex in the PC 17 is identified. Coordinate data is set in a large number as coordinate (1), coordinate (2), coordinate (3), ..., coordinate (99), coordinate (100) in a one-to-one correspondence with each vertex data. The VDP 135 recognizes the position in the world coordinate system of each vertex of the particle dispersion object PC 17 by these coordinate data.

  As other data, for example, data of initial scale of particle dispersion object PC17, data of initial α value applied uniformly to all vertex data, data of initial rotation angle of particle dispersion object PC17, etc. include.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the particle dispersion texture PC 18 includes simple data, correlation data corresponding to the simple data, simple image data corresponding to the simple data, and other data other than these. Contains. The single image data is made to correspond to each single data in a one-to-one correspondence, single image data (1), single image data (2), single image data (3), ... single image data (99), single image A large number of image data (100) are set. Each single-piece image data includes, for example, at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table to be referred to in determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Each single image data is data for displaying a single particle image of the same type. Specifically, it is data for displaying "spherical bubbles", and the shape, the size in the initial state, and the color of the "spherical bubbles" are different in part or all of each single image data. In this case, even if the number of particle single particle images to be displayed simultaneously is increased while all the single image data is set with the scale in the initial state, while alleviating the processing load in the VDP 135 when executing particle dispersion rendition, The display surface G is configured to be able to simultaneously display an all-particle simple substance image.

  The types of particles may be different for at least a part of each single image data or for all of them. In addition, the particles may be of the same type, and their shape, scale in the initial state, and color may be the same.

  The single data of the particle dispersion texture PC 18 is set as a single (1), a single (2), a single (3), ..., a single (99), a single (100), and in the VDP 135, these singles are set. A large number of single-piece image data set in the particle dispersion texture PC 18 is individually recognized by the data. The correlation data is set in a large number such as vertex (1), vertex (2), vertex (3),..., Vertex (99), vertex (100) in a one-to-one correspondence with each single-piece data. The VDP 135 recognizes, based on the correlation data, which of the vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 corresponds to each of the simplex image data of the particle dispersion texture PC 18.

  Other data includes data of an α value individually applied to each single image data, data of an α value uniformly applied to each single image data, and the like.

  Here, initial data is set to each coordinate data in the particle dispersion object PC 17, and these initial data have different coordinates. Each coordinate data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritable, and when the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set in the world coordinate system, each coordinate data is rewritten to data of coordinates different from the initial data. It is set in the closed state. A plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set as reference data for rewriting used to perform such rewriting.

  At least two types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) to 33 (e), first key data KD1, second key data KD2, and third key data are set. Three types of KD3 are set. Each of the key data KD1 to KD3 includes correlation data and coordinate data corresponding to the correlation data.

  Specifically, the correlation data of the first key data KD1, the correlation data of the second key data KD2, and the correlation data of the third key data KD3 all correspond to the vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 to be applied. One-to-one correspondence is set, and a large number of vertexes (1), vertices (2), vertices (3),..., Vertices (99), vertices (100) are set.

  On the other hand, a large number of coordinate data of the first key data KD1, coordinate data of the second key data KD2, and coordinate data of the third key data KD3 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each correlation data, There is a difference in comparison between identical correlation data.

  Specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 includes coordinates (1-1), coordinates (2-1), coordinates (3-1), ..., coordinates (99-1), coordinates (100). The coordinate data of the second key data KD2 includes coordinates (1-2), coordinates (2-2), coordinates (3-2), ..., coordinates (99-2). , And a large number of coordinates (100-2), and the coordinate data of the third key data KD3 are coordinates (1-3), coordinates (2-3), coordinates (3-3),. A large number of coordinates (99-3) and coordinates (100-3) are set. The coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (1) are coordinates (1-1) in the first key data KD1, coordinates (1-2) in the second key data KD2, and coordinates (2) in the third key data KD3. 1-3) and the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (100) are coordinates (100-1) in the first key data KD1, coordinates (100-2) in the second key data KD2, and the third key In the data KD3, different coordinate data is set for one vertex data as indicated by coordinates (100-3).

  Incidentally, each key data KD1 to KD3 is set to have a smaller data volume than the particle dispersion object PC 17 in relation to the fact that the data of the α value and the data of the rotation angle are not set.

  As described above, each key data KD1 to KD3 is set to determine the displacement trajectory of each particle single particle image, and the order of application to the particle dispersion object PC 17 is predetermined. Specifically, the second key data KD2 is used when setting coordinate data on the displacement direction ahead side of each particle single particle image rather than the first key data KD1, and the third key data KD3 is the second key data It is used when setting the coordinate data of the displacement direction tip side of each particle unitary image rather than KD2. When the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set in the world coordinate system, the coordinate data of the key data KD1 to KD3 is applied to each vertex data, so that each particle single image corresponding to each vertex data is respectively It is displaced by the orbit of

  In this case, the coordinate data of a plurality of key data KD1 to KD3, more specifically, two key data KD1 to KD3 are applied to each vertex data in a state of being fused at least for a predetermined number of frames. . Specifically, the first key data KD1 for determining the coordinate data of each vertex data in the first frame of particle dispersion rendition (that is, image update timing) is the first frame number which is a plurality of frames after the first frame It is used over the first frame period corresponding to (for example, 99 frames). The second key data KD2 corresponds to the first frame period, a first switching target frame corresponding to the next frame with respect to the first frame period, and a second frame number corresponding to a plurality of subsequent frames. It is used over two frame periods. The third key data KD3 is used over the second frame period. In this case, the first number of frames and the second number of frames are the same number of frames.

  The fourth key data may be set after the third key data KD3. In this case, the third key data KD3 is the next frame with respect to the second frame period and the second frame period. , And the third frame period corresponding to the third frame number (the same number of frames as the first frame number and the second frame number) which is a plurality of subsequent frames corresponding to The fourth key data is used for the third frame period.

  With this configuration, the number of the key data KD1 to KD3 is smaller than the number of continuous frames when the particle dispersion rendition is executed, more specifically, in the particle dispersion object PC17 in the particle dispersion rendition. Even when the coordinate data of each vertex data is set to a number smaller than the number of times of change, it is possible to smoothly display the displacement of each particle single particle image.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for performing particle dispersion rendition will be described using the particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and the key data KD1 to KD3. The particle dispersion object PC 17, the particle dispersion texture PC 18, and the key data KD 1 to KD 3 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

  FIG. 34 (a) is a flow chart showing the operation processing for particle dispersion effect executed by the display CPU 131. Arithmetic processing for particle dispersion rendition is executed in the arithmetic processing for rendition in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14). In addition, the arithmetic processing for particle dispersion rendition is started when the data table corresponding to the game round in which the particle dispersion rendition is executed is set.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not particle dispersion rendering is being performed. When the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not it is the start timing of the particle dispersion effect. If it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing is ended as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2103.

  In step S2103, the particle dispersion object PC 17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2103, in the setting process for control start immediately before (step S901), the process for start of control for the particle dispersion object PC 17 is completed. Further, information for control of the particle dispersion object PC 17 for which control has been started is stored in the work RAM 132 until the particle dispersion effect is completed.

  In the following step S2104, an initial reading process for reading out the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 from the memory module 133 is executed, and in step S2105 various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17. The control information related to the particle dispersion object PC 17 is updated. Thereafter, after the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect is stored in step S2106, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for particle dispersion rendition is executed, in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, the information for using the particle dispersion object PC 17 for the particle dispersion texture PC 18 is used. The first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 read out at step S2104 and the parameters calculated at step S2105 are set. Further, start designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be started is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2101 that particle dispersion rendering is being performed, it is determined in step S2107 based on the currently set data table whether or not it is time to update key data. The update timing corresponds to the first switching target frame described above.

  If it is not the key data update timing (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, the particle dispersion object PC 17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

  In the following step S2109, processing for determining the blend ratio of key data is executed. In the process of determining the blending ratio, the two key data KD1 to KD3 currently set by referring to the blending table BT as shown in FIG. 34 (b) stored in advance in the memory module 133. The data of the blend ratio at the time of blending each coordinate data of is read out, and each coordinate data is blended by the read out data.

  More specifically, with regard to the blending table BT, data of the number of frames is set in the blending table BT, and is set as key data on the front side in a one-to-one correspondence with data of each frame number. The ratio to be applied to each set of coordinate data and the ratio to be applied to each set of coordinate data set on the rear key data are set. In this case, the blending table BT is set such that the blending ratio changes at a constant ratio each time the number of frames increases by one, that is, each time the coordinate of each particle image is updated. Specifically, for the key data on the front side, the ratio at the time of blending decreases by 1% each time each update timing comes, and for the key data on the rear side, 1% every time each update timing comes. The blending table BT is set such that the ratio at the time of blending increases one by one, and that the sum of the ratio of the key data on the front side and the ratio of the key data on the rear side becomes 100% at each update timing.

  Note that the blending table BT is not limited to the configuration in which the ratio is set to change by 1% at each update timing, and may be 2% or 3%. It may be set to change by% or more, or may be set to change at a different ratio instead of a fixed ratio.

  In step S2109, the blending table BT is referred to based on the data table currently set. In step S2109, based on the current pointer information set in the data table, the number of frames to be referred to in the blending table BT is grasped, and the front side key data set in the number of frames is Read out the ratio and the ratio of the rear key data. In this case, if the currently set data table is the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the first key data KD1 corresponds to the front key data, and the second key data KD2 is the rear key It corresponds to data.

  Thereafter, in step S2110, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17, and the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17 is updated. In step S2111, the particle dispersion representation is performed. After storing the update designation information, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for particle dispersion rendition is executed, in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, the information for using the particle dispersion object PC 17 for the particle dispersion texture PC 18 is used. The data is set together with the information of the use instruction, and the data of the blend ratio determined in step S2109 and the parameter calculated in step S2110 are set. Further, update designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be updated is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2107 that the key data update timing has come, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, the particle dispersion object PC 17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

  In the following step S2113, processing for reading out new key data is executed. In this process, the next key data KD1 to KD3 are read from the memory module 133 with respect to the key data on the rear side out of the currently set two key data. Specifically, since the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 are currently set, the key data on the rear side among them is the second key data KD2, whereas the key data in the next order is the second key data KD2. The third key data KD3 is obtained.

  Thereafter, in step S2114, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17, and the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17 is updated. In step S2115, the particle dispersion effect is displayed. After storing the update designation information, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for particle dispersion rendition is executed, in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, the information for using the particle dispersion object PC 17 for the particle dispersion texture PC 18 is used. The third key data KD3 read out in step S2112 and the parameter calculated in step S2113 are set together with the information of the use instruction. Further, update designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be updated is set in the drawing list.

  By the way, from the next processing cycle when the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2107 and the processing in step S2108 to step S2111 is executed until the end timing of particle dispersion rendering comes. In this case, in step S2109, the blend ratio is sequentially determined with the second key data KD2 as the front side key data and the second key data KD2 as the rear side key data.

  Next, the setting process for particle dispersion rendition executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for particle dispersion effect is executed in the setting process for effect in step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). In addition, the setting process for particle dispersion rendition is started when either of the particle dispersion rendition start designation information and the particle dispersion rendition update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether start designation information of particle dispersion effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, the memory module 133 recognizes the address at which the particle dispersion object PC 17 is stored based on the current drawing list in step S 2202, and the particle dispersion object PC 17 is stored in the VRAM 134. It is read into the expansion buffer 141. Thereafter, in step S2203, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the current drawing list are stored in the register 153.

  In the following step S2204, an initial application process is performed. In the initial application process, the start coordinates of each vertex data are set by rewriting each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 with each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1. In step S2205, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC 17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC 17.

  Thereafter, in step S2206, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the particle dispersion object PC 17, and this setting process is ended. Thereby, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set at coordinates corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1. In the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the particle simplex image data corresponding to each vertex data for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above is It is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the start designation of particle dispersion effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether new key data is designated in the current drawing list.

  If not specified, in step S2008, coordinate blending processing is performed. In the blending process, two sets of key data currently set, specifically, coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the first frame period are set in the current drawing list. Blend according to the blend ratio data being used.

In this case, first, coordinate data corresponding to one vertex data of the first key data KD1 is read, and coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data of the second key data KD2 is read. Then, the former coordinate data is (x1, y1, z1), the latter coordinate data is (x2, y2, z2), the ratio of the front key data read from the blending table BT is rt1, and the blending table BT Assuming that the ratio of the key data on the rear side after readout is rt2, coordinate data (x, y, z) after blending is
x: x 1 x rt 1 + x 2 x rt 2
y: y1 x rt1 + y2 x rt2
z: z1 x rt1 + z2 x rt2
Blend to be Also, such blending is performed on coordinate data corresponding to all vertex data.

  In the subsequent step S2209, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17. Thereafter, in step S2210, each coordinate data, which is the blending result in step S2208, is set for the particle dispersion object PC 17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters grasped in step S2209 are the particles After setting for the distribution object PC 17, this setting process is ended.

  In this case, when setting each coordinate data that is the blending result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritten to each coordinate data that is the blending result in step S2208. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set at coordinates corresponding to the blending result in step S2208. In the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the particle simplex image data corresponding to each vertex data for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above is It is set.

  If it is determined in step S2207 that new key data is designated in the current drawing list, key data update processing is executed in step S2211. In the updating process, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153, the key data on the front side, specifically the first key data KD1, is newly set to the new key data set in the current drawing list. Specifically, it is rewritten to the third key data KD3.

  In the subsequent step S2212, the application processing at the time of updating is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. In step S2213, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

  Thereafter, in step S 2214, each coordinate data grasped in step S 2212 is set for the particle dispersion object PC 17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters grasped in step S 2214 are for the particle dispersion. After setting for the object PC 17, the setting process ends.

  In this case, when setting each coordinate data grasped in step S2212, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritten to each coordinate data grasped in step S2212. Thereby, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2. In the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the particle simplex image data corresponding to each vertex data for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above is It is set.

  By the way, from the next processing cycle when the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2207 and processing of step S2208 to step S2210 is executed until the end timing of particle dispersion rendering comes. In this case, in step S2208, blending of coordinates is performed using the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3.

  Next, the contents of the particle dispersion effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the particle dispersion rendition, and FIGS. 36 (b-1) and (b-2) are simply a locus on which each particle single-piece image is displaced. It is an explanatory view for explaining.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the particle dispersion effect is executed as an effect for game circulation, specifically, when the combination of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines when the game operation is over. The particle dispersion rendition is executed. In the particle dispersion rendition, a large number of particle single particle images PT that are “spherical bubbles” are displayed on the display surface G, and these multiple particle single particle images PT are displaced at predetermined trajectories over a plurality of continuous frames. Is displayed on.

  The predetermined trajectory is specifically described with reference to FIGS. 36 (b-1) and (b-2). In the state in which each coordinate data of the first key data KD1 is set, the particle simplex image PT1, Each of the single particle image PT2 and the single particle image PT3 is displayed at a position corresponding to the start coordinate indicated by a solid line in FIG. 36 (b-1). In this case, the single particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

  In the subsequent first frame period, the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 36 (b-1), the particle single image PT1, Each of the particle single image PT2 and the particle single image PT3 is displayed as if they are displaced in different trajectories. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the particle single images PT1 to PT3 are linear.

  When the first frame period has elapsed, each coordinate data of the second key data KD2 is set, whereby each of the particle single image PT1, the particle single image PT2, and the particle single image PT3 is displayed as shown in FIG. In 2), it is displayed at a position corresponding to the switching target coordinates shown by a solid line. In this case, the single particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

  In the subsequent second frame period, the blending process of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3 is executed, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 36 (b-2), the particle single image PT1, Each of the particle single image PT2 and the particle single image PT3 is displayed as if they are displaced in different trajectories. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the particle single images PT1 to PT3 are linear. Further, the trajectories of the particle single images PT1 to PT3 in the second frame period are different from the trajectories in the case of the first frame period.

  As described above, in the particle dispersion rendition, the coordinate data of each vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set while using the blend of multiple types of key data KD1 to KD3, thereby reducing the data volume and It is possible to perform a display effect as if a large number of particle single images are dispersed while achieving a balance between the two to reduce the processing load.

  In other words, a configuration may be considered in which animation data in which coordinate data of single image data is set over all frame numbers is set to correspond to all single image data on a one-to-one basis. Become. On the other hand, by using a blend of multiple types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, the required data capacity can be reduced as compared to the configuration in which all animation data are set as described above. It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, a configuration is also conceivable in which the coordinate data of all single image data is calculated only by processing based on a program, but in this case, assuming that each single particle image is displaced by different trajectories, it is so complicated A huge program is needed. On the other hand, by using a blend of multiple types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, information for calculating coordinate data is appropriately dispersed between the program side and the data side. It is possible to reduce the load.

  Further, the data volume of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 is reduced by setting the single image data in correspondence with each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 instead of setting as a single object. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when reading objects for setting single image data also in the VDP 135, individual objects corresponding to single image data can be read as the particle dispersion object PC 17 instead of reading them individually. The processing load required for the reading can be reduced.

  Further, since the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed not by the display CPU 131 but by the VDP 135, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Another form of setting processing for particle dispersion effect>
FIG. 37 is a flow chart for explaining another form of setting processing for particle dispersion effect performed in the VDP 135.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether start designation information of particle dispersion effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S 2302, the memory module 133 recognizes the address at which the particle dispersion object PC 17 is stored based on the current drawing list, and reads the particle dispersion object PC 17. Thereafter, in step S2303, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the current drawing list are stored in the register 153.

  In the subsequent step S2304, the memory module 133 grasps the address at which the first texture and the second texture are stored, based on the current drawing list.

  Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of textures are set in correspondence with each of the key data KD1 to KD3 on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, the first texture, the second texture, and the third texture are set in one-to-one correspondence with the first key data KD1, the second key data KD2, and the third key data KD3. In a configuration in which four or more types of key data are set, four or more types of textures may be set correspondingly to that.

  Similar to the particle dispersion texture PC 18 shown in FIG. 33, simplex image data is set to each of the textures in one-to-one correspondence with each vertex data. As described above, by setting a plurality of types of textures for a single particle dispersion object PC 17, the type of single image data set for one vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is a plurality of frames. (I.e., a plurality of update timings), and the change is further performed on a large number of vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17, more specifically, on all vertex data.

  For example, in the first texture, the single-piece image data for the first vertex data is the first single-piece image data for displaying the first single-piece image (for example, "o" shown in FIG. 36). In the second texture, the single image data for the first vertex data is the second single image data for displaying the second single image (for example, “□” shown in FIG. 36). Similarly, in the first texture, the single-piece image data for the second vertex data is the third single-piece image data for displaying a third single-piece image (for example, “Δ” shown in FIG. 36). In the second texture, the single-piece image data for the second vertex data is single-piece image data for displaying a single-piece image (for example, “o” shown in FIG. 36) different from the third single-piece image.

  After the process of step S2304 is performed, initial application processing is performed in step S2305 as in step S2204. As a result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set to the start coordinate corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1.

  Thereafter, in step S2306, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC 17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC 17, and in step S2307 After the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the particle dispersion object PC 17, the present setting process is ended. Also, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above, the first texture of the first texture and the second texture is used. Only applies to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, a single image corresponding to the first texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the first key data KD1.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the start designation of particle dispersion effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S2308. In step S2308, it is determined whether new key data is designated in the current drawing list.

  If not specified, in step S2309, the numerical value information of the blending counter provided in the register 153 is updated so as to be incremented by one. Here, with the blending counter, when blending coordinate data using a plurality of key data, and blending single image data using a plurality of textures, the blending ratio is specified by the VDP 135 Is a counter to

  The blending counter is set to “0” as an initial value, and when the counter value is “1”, the ratio of the key data on the front side (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 99% and the rear side is set. The ratio of the key data (for example, second key data KD2) is 1%, the ratio of the texture on the front side (for example, the first texture) is 99%, and the ratio of the texture on the rear side (for example, the second texture) is 1 And%. When the counter value is "2", the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is 98% and the ratio of the rear key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is 2 The ratio of the texture on the front side (for example, the first texture) is 98%, and the ratio of the texture on the rear side (for example, the second texture) is 2%. When the counter value is "99", the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is 1% and the ratio of the rear key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is 99. The ratio of the texture on the front side (for example, the first texture) is 1%, and the ratio of the texture on the rear side (for example, the second texture) is 99%. That is, as the number of frames advances, the application rate of the key data on the front side is reduced while the application rate of the key data on the rear side is increased, and the application rate of the texture on the front side is similarly reduced. The side texture application rate is increased.

  Although the information of the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the blend counter as described above is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as table information, the present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical information of the blend counter It is good also as composition which computes information on a blend rate corresponding to に よ っ て according to an operation formula defined by a program.

  In the following step S2310, coordinate blending processing is performed. In the blending process, the coordinate process of the two key data currently set, specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the first frame period, is updated in the step S2309. It blends according to the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the counter for blending later. The specific calculation method of this blend is the same as in the case of step S2208 above.

  In the following step S2311, texture blending processing is performed. In the blending process, for the blending after the updating process in step S2309, two single texture data currently grasped, specifically, single image data of the first texture and the second texture in the case of the first frame period are used. Blend according to the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the counter.

For example, while reading out simplex image data corresponding to one vertex data of the first texture, simplex image data corresponding to the vertex data of the second texture is read out first. Then, each color information of RGB in the former single-piece image data (here, 1 pixel for convenience of explanation) is (r1, g1, b1), and the latter single-piece image data (here, 1 pixel for convenience of explanation) (R2, g2, b2), the ratio of the texture on the front side corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter is rt3, and the ratio of the texture on the rear side corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter is rt4 (rt3 + rt4 = 1) When blending, the single image data (r, g, b) after blending is
r: r1 × rt3 + r2 × rt4
g: g1 × rt3 + g2 × rt4
b: b1 × rt3 + b2 × rt4
Blend to be Also, such blending is performed on single-piece image data corresponding to all vertex data.

  Thereafter, in step S2312, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2313 After the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the particle dispersion object PC 17, the present setting process is ended.

  In this case, when setting each coordinate data that is the blend result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritten to each coordinate data that is the blend result in step S2310. In the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, each single-piece image data which is the blending result in step S2311 is set for each vertex data set in the coordinates as described above. Applied. As a result, a single image corresponding to the blending result in step S2311 is displayed at coordinates corresponding to the blending result in step S2310.

  Here, since the blending ratio is derived on the VDP 135 side using the blending counter as described above, the processing for deriving the blending ratio is not executed in the display CPU 131. Thus, the processing load on the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

  The display CPU 131 uses the combination of the predetermined key data such as the combination of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 or the combination of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3. The number of times of changing the blend ratio of data may be instructed to the VDP 135, and the VDP 135 may uniquely determine the blend ratio in each change time according to the instruction. In this case, when there are a plurality of types of periods in which the same one is used as a combination of predetermined key data, the processing load of VDP 135 is larger in a specific period compared to the other periods, in that specific period. By reducing the number of changes instructed by the display CPU 131, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 135. Further, in the above configuration, the VDP 135 may be set so that the blend ratio is changed at a constant rate in each change time. In this case, each of the VDPs 135 is uniquely determined according to the instructed number of changes. Data may be set so as to derive the blend ratio of change times, or may be configured to derive the blend ratio of each change time by calculation.

  If it is determined in step S2308 that new key data is designated in the current drawing list, initialization of the blending counter is executed in step S2314. Thus, the calculation of the blend ratio is started from the beginning from the next processing time.

  In the following step S2315, key data update processing is executed. In the updating process, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153, the key data on the front side, specifically the first key data KD1, is newly set to the new key data set in the current drawing list. Specifically, it is rewritten to the third key data KD3. In step S2316, a new texture is grasped. In the processing, the texture on the front side, specifically the first texture, of the two textures currently stored in the register 153, the new texture set in the current drawing list, specifically the first texture. Rewrite to 3 textures. At the time of this rewriting, reading of the third texture from the memory module 133 is performed.

  In the following step S2317, the application processing at the time of updating is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. In step S2318, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

  Thereafter, in step S2319, each coordinate data grasped in step S2317 is set for the particle dispersion object PC 17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameter grasped in step S2318 is used for the particle dispersion. After setting for the object PC 17, the setting process ends.

  In this case, when setting each coordinate data, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritten to each coordinate data grasped in the step S2317. Also, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the second texture of the second texture and the third texture is applied to each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above. Only applies to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, a single image corresponding to the second texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2.

  By the way, from the next processing cycle when the third key data KD3 and the third texture are newly set, a negative decision is made in step S2308 until the end timing of the particle dispersion rendition is reached, and the processing in step S2309 to step S2313 Run. In this case, in step S2310, blending of coordinates is performed using the second key data KD2 and third key data KD3, and in step S2311, blending of single image data is performed using the second texture and the third texture. Ru.

  As described above, in another mode for executing particle dispersion rendition, the display aspect of particle dispersion rendition is changed by the texture applied to the same object being different as the rendition progresses. And the monotonization of the display effect is suppressed. In this case, different textures are not used for each frame in which the display mode is changed, but the texture corresponding to the first update timing and the second update timing later than a plurality of update timings are supported. By blending with the selected textures, the image data to be used between the first update timing and the second update timing is created, so the number of textures stored in advance can be reduced. Thus, the data capacity can be reduced.

  Further, each texture is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each key data, and switching of each texture is performed in accordance with switching of each key data. Therefore, the processing load of processing related to switching in the VDP 135 can be reduced.

<Another embodiment of particle dispersion effect>
· In the particle dispersion effect described above (in the case of FIG. 35 and in the case of FIG. 37), the number of key data KD1 to KD3 is set larger, and the number of frames until switching of key data KD1 to KD3 to be used is reduced By doing this (for example, every 10 frames), while blending of coordinate data is performed, a single image may be displaced and displayed so as to draw a curved locus instead of a linear one.

  An object to be blended using the key data KD1 to KD3 may be an α value for setting transparency, in addition to or in place of coordinate data, or color information of vertex data or the like without performing texture mapping It may be a vertex color which makes it possible to determine color information of a polygon composed of a plurality of vertex data. Also, in the configuration that performs UV scrolling in which the display mode is changed by changing the UV value for determining the relative pasting position of the texture with respect to the object, and even when the same texture is pasted, the UV The value may be changed using a blend of key data.

  The first frame period and the second frame period are not limited to the same number of frames, and the number of frames included in these frame periods may be different. In this case, it is necessary to perform blending processing according to each frame period.

  The type of single image data for displaying a single image may be the same. In this case, since it is not necessary to set single image data in correspondence with each single data in the particle dispersion texture PC 18, the data volume of the particle dispersion texture PC 18 can be reduced.

  In place of the configuration in which blending is performed using two types of key data, blending may be performed using three or more types of key data. In this case, by appropriately changing the blending ratio of these three types of key data, it is possible to make the trajectory when the single image is displaced into a curved shape instead of a linear shape. When blending is performed using three or more types of key data, for example, virtual arcs and spheres are assumed by calculation from the three or more types of key data, and displacement is performed along the assumed virtual arcs and spheres. Alternatively, a single image may be displayed in the same manner as in FIG.

  The VDP 135 may have a dedicated circuit that calculates vertex data using key data. Further, the VDP 135 may be configured to have a dedicated circuit that calculates vertex data when the key data is not used. By individually configuring these circuits, it becomes possible to specialize in calculation of each vertex data, and it becomes possible to preferably calculate vertex data.

  The configuration in which parameter data is derived using key data as described above may be applied to a configuration in which image display is performed using image data of two-dimensional information such as sprite data. For example, in the case of deriving the parameter of the coordinate in the case of setting the sprite data in the frame buffer 142, it is possible to blend a plurality of key data.

<Configuration for performing sea level display>
Next, a configuration for performing sea surface display will be described.

  The sea level display is an effect for displaying the sea level in the background, and is an effect that is displayed so as to be wavy over a plurality of consecutive frames (a plurality of image update timings) of the sea level. The sea surface display is a display effect to be executed in the first display mode out of the above-described first display mode and second display mode. In the sea surface display, a sea surface object and normal map data for finely changing the movement of the sea surface object are used.

  These sea surface objects and normal map data will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b). FIG. 38 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the sea surface object PC 19, and FIG. 38 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the normal line map data ND1 and ND2.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, the sea surface object PC 19 has a large number of surface data (polygons) SD defined by a plurality of vertex data so as to form a plurality of lines and a plurality of columns. In this case, each surface data SD has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, the surface data SD in the lower left corner in FIG. 38 (a) has the information in the first column and the first row as the order information, and the surface data SD in the upper right corner in FIG. It has 25 lines of information as the order information.

  Each surface data SD is defined as a quadrangle by four vertex data, but is not limited to this, and may be defined as a triangle by three vertex data, and by five or more vertex data It may be defined as another polygon. Also, any one surface data SD is adjacent to another surface data SD, and vertex data of the one surface data SD is also used as vertex data of the other surface data SD. That is, the sides of the surface data SD are common to the adjacent surface data SD. Therefore, basically, when the coordinate data of one vertex data is changed, a plurality of surface data SD will be deformed, and the coordinate data of one side composed of two adjacent vertex data is changed In this case, the direction of the plurality of surface data SD is changed.

  Initial coordinate data of each vertex data is set in the sea surface object PC 19 in order to determine coordinates of the initial state of each surface data SD and orientation of the surface. In addition to this, data of initial scale of the object PC19 for sea surface, data of initial α value applied uniformly to all vertex data (or surface data SD), initial rotation angle of object PC19 for sea surface Data etc. are included.

  Here, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 is divided into a plurality of groups by putting together a plurality of adjacent surface data SD, and more specifically, the first surface data group,. It has a data group (k is an integer of 2 or more, and k = 25 in the present embodiment). Although the number of surface data SD included in each surface data group is the same as the predetermined number (specifically, 25) of the plurality, the number of surface data SD included between at least some of the surface data groups The numbers may be different. In FIG. 38A, each unit surrounded by a thick line corresponds to a surface data group.

  The coordinate and the direction of the surface of each of the surface data groups are individually determined based on the control of the display CPU 131. More specifically, the entire surface data SD included in the first surface data group constitutes the same surface facing a predetermined direction, and in this state, the coordinates of the surface data SD as a reference in the first surface data group are at predetermined coordinates The coordinates of each surface data SD included in the first surface data group and the orientation of the surface are determined as follows. That is, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are first roughly determined in units of sea surface data groups. Hereinafter, the coordinates and the orientation determined in units of the surface data groups are also referred to as a form of the first stage.

  In addition, although surface data SD used as a reference | standard is single surface data SD in each surface data group, several surface data SD may be sufficient. Further, instead of setting coordinates based on the surface data SD, coordinates serving as a reference may be set for vertex data constituting the corner portion of the surface data group. In this case, Coordinates serving as a reference may be set for all, or coordinates serving as a reference may be set for only one corner portion. Further, in order to make the sea surface object PC 19 as a series, in the adjacent surface data group, the coordinates and the orientation of the surface are determined so that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary portion between the two become the same.

  The normal map data ND1 and ND2 are data for making the directions of each surface data SD included in each surface data group different from each other after the form of the first stage is determined in units of each surface data group. A plurality of types, specifically, two types of normal map data ND1, ND2 are stored in advance in the memory module 133. Each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 has a large number of unit normal data UND for changing the direction of each surface data SD from the form of the first stage. In the following description, one of the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 is also referred to as first normal map data ND1, and the other is also referred to as second normal map data ND2.

  FIG. 38 (b) is an image diagram of normal map data ND1, ND2 having a large number of unit normal data UND, where each square portion arranged to form a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns is a unit method Indicates line data UND. In this case, in each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2, each unit normal data UND has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38 (b), unit normal data UND in the lower left corner has information of the first column and the first row as order information, and in FIG. 38 (b) unit normal data UND in the upper right corner is The information in column 35, line 35 is included as the order information.

  Each unit normal data UND has data of the direction when changing the direction of each surface data SD from the form of the first step and data of the amount of change when changing in the direction (hereinafter also referred to as change data). doing. In this case, in one set of normal map data ND1 and ND2, data of the direction to be changed and data of the amount of change in the direction are the same between some of the unit normal data UND. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all unit normal data UND may be different.

  Between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, although the same change data determined by each unit normal data UND is included, the arrangement of the change data does not match. In this case, the change data determined by each unit normal data UND may be different in all the order information between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, and each unit method in at least a part of the order information The modified data determined by the line data UND may be different. In each normal map data ND1, ND2, the number of unit normal data UND is the same but may be different.

  The number of unit normal data UND in each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is set to be larger than the number of plane data SD constituting the sea surface object PC19. In this configuration, when unit normal data UND of normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied to surface data SD of sea surface object PC19, in the range where entire surface data SD is included in each normal map data ND1 and ND2, The unit normal data UND to be applied to the surface data SD as a reference is selected, and the relationship is used as a reference and by using the order information on the surface data SD side and the order information on the unit normal data UND side, Unit normal data UND corresponding to surface data SD other than reference surface data SD is selected.

  More specifically, in the configuration including the surface data SD for the m-th column and the n-th row (m and n are integers of 1 or more), the surface data SD as a reference is the first row and the first row, When the corresponding unit normal data UND is the sth column and the t row (s and t are integers of 1 or more), the unit normal data UND to be used this time is the sth column to the (s + m-1) th column The tth column to the (t + n-1) th row. Therefore, the unit normal data UND is read from the normal map data ND1, ND2. Then, in the unit normal data UND read out, conversion of the order information is performed by an operation in which the order information of the sth column and the tth row becomes the first column and the first row, and the converted order information Are associated with the plane data SD of the same order information.

  A method for applying the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 to the sea surface object PC19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 39A, in the case of changing the direction of the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 using the normal map data ND1, ND2, the pair of normal map data ND1, ND2 is the sea surface object. It applies simultaneously to PC19. In this case, at the start of sea level display, unit normal data UND of the corner portion of one normal map data ND1 coincides with the corner portion on the same side of sea surface object PC19, and of sea surface object PC19. Data setting is performed such that all surface data SD correspond to different unit normal data UND. Similarly, for the other normal map data ND2, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of the normal map data ND2 matches the corner portion on the same side of the sea surface object PC19, and the sea surface object Data setting is performed such that all surface data SD of the PC 19 correspond to different unit normal data UND.

  In this case, unit normal data UND of one normal map data ND1 and unit normal data UND of the other normal map data ND2 simultaneously correspond to the same surface data SD. When applying the modified data of the unit normal data UND to the surface data SD, the direction of the surface data SD based on the modified data corresponding to one normal map data ND1 and the other normal map data ND2 Blending of each change data is performed so as to be an intermediate orientation with the direction of the surface data SD according to the change data, and the change data of the blended result is applied to the surface data SD.

  In FIG. 39 (a), although the position of the corner portion serving as the reference at the start is different between one normal map data ND1 and the other normal map data ND2, they are the same. It is also good. Even in this case, since the arrangement of the modified data is different between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, the contents of the modified data applied to the surface data SD are the same in both normal map data ND1 and ND2. Event does not occur for all surface data SD.

  Thereafter, as the number of frames in the sea surface display progresses, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), unit normal data UND corresponding to the surface data SD as the reference of the sea surface object PC19 is The two normal map data ND1 and ND2 are changed. However, at the time of this change, the change is performed so that all surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 correspond to different unit normal data UND.

  By changing the unit normal data UND corresponding to the reference plane data SD in this manner, it is possible to gradually change the direction in which the direction of each plane data SD is changed, and the sea surface display is richly changed. It becomes possible to make Further, by blending the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, even if the variation of the change data is suppressed to some extent in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is substantially applied to the surface data SD. It is possible to increase the variation of change data.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, a method of applying change data to each surface data SD will be described.

  As described above, the unit normal data UND is individually associated with each surface data SD, but the modified data by the unit normal data UND is not applied to all the surface data SD, Modified data by unit normal data UND is applied only to part of surface data SD1 in each surface data group. In detail, the surface data SD1 to be applied is determined in advance so that the change data is not simultaneously applied to the surface data SD sharing the same vertex data.

  In detail, the surface data SD1 to which change data is applied in each surface data group is limited to a part as shown in FIG. 40 (a). Due to the existence of the surface data SD2, vertex data is not shared among the application target surface data SD1. Further, since the surface data SD1 to be applied does not constitute the corner portion in the surface data group, even when viewed between the surface data groups, the vertex data is shared between the surface data SD1 to be applied. Not. With such a configuration, even if the direction of the surface data SD is changed at random using the normal map data ND1 and ND2, the surface data SD1 between the surface data SD1 of the application target The buffer surface data SD2 for absorbing the difference in the orientation of the object exists, and the continuity as the surface of the sea surface object PC19 can be secured.

  The state in which the direction of each surface data SD is changed from the form of the first stage by applying the change data to the surface data SD1 to be applied is shown in FIGS. 40 (b-1) and (b-2). Show. As shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), in the form of the first stage, each surface data SD1 and SD2 included in a predetermined surface data group are directed in the same direction, and form the same surface. There is.

  Of the surface data SD1 and SD2, the second and fourth ones are the surface data SD1 to be applied, and the blend result of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 for the second and fourth surface data SD1. Certain change data is applied. At this time, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the second and fourth surface data SD1 are changed to directions based on the corresponding change data. In addition, the first, third and fifth surface data SD2 which is not the surface data SD1 to be applied but the buffer surface data SD2 is the sea surface object in a mode in which the amount of change from the form of the first stage is the smallest. The orientation is changed to secure continuity as the face of the PC 19.

  The specific processing configuration for setting the direction of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 will be described below.

  FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing the operation processing for sea surface display executed by the display CPU 131. The arithmetic processing for sea surface display is executed in the background arithmetic processing in step S 903 of the task processing (FIG. 14). In addition, the arithmetic processing for sea surface display is executed under the condition of the first display mode, and is executed as part of the processing of step S1502 to step S1505 in FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not sea surface display is in progress. If the sea surface display is not being performed, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not it is a start timing of the sea surface display. If it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing is ended as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S 2403.

  In step S2403, the sea surface object PC 19 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S 2403, in the setting process for control start immediately before (step S 901), the process for control start of the sea surface object PC 19 is completed. Further, information for control of the sea surface object PC 19 whose control has been started is stored in the work RAM 132 until the sea surface display is completed.

  In the subsequent step S2404, information for instructing the VDP 135 to store the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 as control targets is stored. However, the display CPU 131 does not execute arithmetic processing required to actually apply the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 to the sea surface object PC19. That is, the display CPU 131 instructs the VDP 135 that the data ND1 and ND2 should be used for the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2, but the data ND1 and ND2 are actually Do not execute arithmetic processing to control Thus, the processing load on the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

  In the subsequent step S2405, the animation data for sea surface is read out from the memory module 133 into the work RAM 132. FIG. 41 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the sea surface animation data AD. The sea surface animation data AD is data for controlling the sea surface object PC 19 in units of plane data groups, and the sea surface is determined by determining the reference coordinates and direction of each plane data group by the sea surface animation data AD. The form of the first stage is determined for the target object PC19.

  More specifically, in the animation data for sea surface, a plurality of pointer information is set so as to be serial numbers, and in each of the pointer information, data and direction of reference coordinates for each surface data group are set. Data is set. For example, for the first surface data group, data (A1-1) of reference coordinates and data (B1-1) of direction are set corresponding to the first pointer information, and the second pointer Reference coordinate data (A1-2) and direction data (B1-2) are set corresponding to the information, and f-th pointer information (f is an integer of 3 or more, for example, "50") Data (A1-f) of the reference coordinates and data (B1-f) of the direction are set in correspondence with. Further, the data of the reference coordinates and the data of the direction are set corresponding to each pointer information also for the second surface data group,..., The k-th surface data group.

  The pointer information is updated when advancing by one frame (when the image update timing is reached) in the situation where sea level display is being performed, and the combination of the data of the reference coordinates and the data of the direction is next as the pointer information is updated. Will be changed to the order of. In this case, the data of the continuous reference coordinates and the data of the direction are set such that the form of the first stage has motion continuity in each surface data group.

  In addition, although the arrangement mode of the data of the reference coordinates and the data of the direction along with the progress of the pointer information is different between the surface data groups, the form continuity is not lost between the adjacent surface data groups. Data of the reference coordinates and data of the direction are set. That is, a surface data group in which a plurality of sides are in contact with another surface data group cancels a state in which the surface data group is in contact with the other surface data group if the reference coordinates and the direction of the other surface data group are determined. Otherwise, the reference coordinates and the orientation will be restricted, and in some cases, they will be uniquely determined. In such a situation, reference coordinates and directions of each surface data group are determined in advance so as not to release the state in contact with the other surface data group. Specifically, as described above, in the adjacent plane data group, the data of the reference coordinates and the data of the direction are determined such that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary portion between the two are the same.

  Referring back to FIG. 41A, after the sea surface animation data AD is read out in step S2405, in step S2406, initial setting data is grasped from the sea surface animation data AD. Specifically, a combination of the data of the reference coordinates and the data of the direction set corresponding to the first pointer information is read out for the entire surface data group as the data for start. Thereafter, after the sea surface display start designation information is stored in step S2407, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the operation processing for displaying the sea surface is executed, information on the usage instruction of the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the first method Information of usage instructions of the line map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is set. Furthermore, while initial setting data for the form of the first stage grasped in step S2406 is set, start designation information of sea surface display indicating that sea surface display should be started is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that sea level display is in progress, the process advances to step S2408. In step S2408, the sea surface object PC 19 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. In step S2409, the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In the following step S2410, the pointer information of the sea surface animation data AD already read out to the work RAM 132 is updated so as to increase by 1, and in step S2411 the updated data corresponding to the updated pointer information is grasped. . More specifically, for this grasping process, a combination of reference coordinate data and direction data set corresponding to updated pointer information is read out for the entire surface data group as update data. Thereafter, in step S 2412, the update designation information of the sea surface display is stored, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the operation processing for displaying the sea surface is executed, information on the usage instruction of the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the first method Information of usage instructions of the line map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is set. Further, the update data of the form of the first stage grasped in step S2411 is set in the drawing list. Furthermore, update designation information of the sea surface display indicating that the sea surface display should be updated is set in the drawing list.

  Although the pointer information of the sea surface animation data AD may correspond to the total number of frames for which sea surface display is performed, in the pachinko machine 10, the pointer information is more than the total number of frames for which sea surface display is performed. The number is set small. In this case, the pointer information becomes the last one during execution of the sea surface display, but in the next frame after the last order, the first pointer information is restored. Also, in view of the looping of the pointer information in this way, the form of the first stage in the last order of the pointer information and the form of the first stage in the first order of the pointer information are the movement of the object for the surface PC 19 It is preferable to have continuity.

  Next, the setting processing for sea surface display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting processing for sea surface display is performed in the state of the first display mode, and is performed as part of the processing in steps S1703 to S1708 in FIG. Further, the setting processing of the sea surface display is started when either of the sea surface display start designation information and the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether start designation information of sea surface display is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S 2502, the memory module 133 grasps the address at which the sea surface object PC 19 is stored based on the current drawing list, and reads the sea surface object PC 19 into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. In step S2503, the memory module 133 recognizes the addresses at which the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are stored based on the current drawing list, and the first normal maps are obtained. The data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are read out to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134.

  In the subsequent step S2504, the initial setting data (data extracted from the animation data for sea surface AD) set in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S2505, the sea surface is applied with the grasped initial setting data. Object PC 19 is set in the world coordinate system. As a result, the sea surface object PC 19 is set to the world coordinate system in the first stage configuration.

  In the following step S2506, an initial setting process to the world coordinate system of the first normal map data ND1 is executed, and in the step S2507, an initial setting process to the world coordinate system of the second normal map data ND2 is executed. As a result, unit normal data UND of the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal to the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are set to the state described with reference to FIG. 39 (a). Unit normal data UND of map data ND2 is associated.

  After that, in step S2508, normal line parameter setting processing is performed, and this setting processing ends. The setting process of the normal line parameter will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal parameter is a parameter that determines the direction of the surface data SD, and more specifically, determines the coordinates of vertex data that configures the surface data SD.

  In the setting process of the normal line parameter, first, in step S2601, the initialization process of the application counter provided in the register 153 is executed. In this processing, the application counter specifies, using the VDP 135, surface data SD1 to which change data set in the unit normal data UND of the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is applied. In the state where the application counter is initialized, numerical information corresponding to the number of the plane data SD1 to which the application is applied is set in the application counter.

  In the subsequent step S2602, the change data is read out from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the first normal map data ND1. Specifically, first, the plane data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter is grasped, and thereafter, the unit normal line data UND correlated with the plane data SD1 in the first normal map data ND1 is grasped Do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal data UND is read out.

  In the following step S2603, the change data is read out from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the second normal map data ND2. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter is grasped, and thereafter, the unit normal data UND correlated with the surface data SD1 in the second normal map data ND2 is grasped Do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal data UND is read out.

  In the following step S2604, blending processing of the change data read out from the first normal map data ND1 in the step S2602 and the change data read out from the second normal map data ND2 in the step S2603 is executed. In the blending process, as described above, the direction of the surface data SD1 based on the modified data corresponding to the first normal map data ND1, and the direction of the surface data SD1 based on the modified data corresponding to the second normal map data ND2. Blending of each change data is performed so as to be in the middle direction of.

  Note that the blending is not limited to the configuration performed so as to be in the middle of each direction of the surface data SD1 when each change data is applied, and relates to the first normal map data ND1 at a predetermined ratio. It may be configured to be closer to the change data or to the change data according to the second normal map data ND2.

  In the following step S2605, the change data of the result of blending in step S2604 is applied to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter. Thereby, the surface data SD1 is changed from the orientation in the form of the first stage to the orientation corresponding to the modified data after the blending. However, as described above, since the change data is given as a relative change amount from the form of the first stage, the change data is not applied as it is, but in the form of the first stage. Based on the direction, the direction is changed from that direction by the amount corresponding to the change amount corresponding to the change data after blending.

  In the subsequent step S2606, the surface data SD2 adjacent to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter, that is, the surface data SD2 sharing vertex data with the surface data SD1 of the application target A process of changing the direction of the surface data SD2) in accordance with the change of the coordinates of the shared vertex data is executed. In this case, for vertex data not shared with the current plane data SD1 to be applied, the direction of the adjacent plane data SD2 is changed without changing the coordinates from the form of the first stage.

  In the subsequent step S2607, the numerical information of the application counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter so that the target for which the normal parameter is set shifts to the next application target plane data SD1.

  Thereafter, in step S2608, it is determined whether the numerical information of the application counter after the update indicates that the setting for all of the application target plane data SD1 is completed, that is, the numerical information of the application counter is " It is determined whether it is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2608, the process returns to step S2602, and the processes in steps S2602 to S2607 are performed on the new application target surface data SD1. If a positive determination is made in step S2608 , This setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the setting processing for sea surface display (FIG. 42), if a negative determination is made in step S2501, update data (from sea surface animation data AD) set in the current drawing list in step S2509. The extracted data) is grasped, and in step S2510, the grasped update data is set in the sea surface object PC 19 already set in the world coordinate system. In this case, the update data is overwritten on the data of the coordinates and direction of each surface data group of the sea surface object PC 19. As a result, the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the world coordinate system again in the form of the first stage.

  In the following step S 2511, update processing of the first normal map data ND 1 is executed, and in step S 2512, update processing of the second normal map data ND 2 is executed. As a result, the unit normal data UND of the first normal map data ND1 associated with each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 and the second method are set to the state described with reference to FIG. 39 (b). The unit normal data UND of the line map data ND2 is changed.

  Thereafter, the setting process of the normal line parameter in step S2508 is performed, and then the setting process ends. The setting process of the normal line parameter is as described above.

  As described above, the coordinates and orientation in the world coordinate system of each surface data SD constituting the sea surface object PC 19 are determined. Then, setting of color information is performed in the setting process of color information in step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16) for the plane data SD. In this case, setting of color information for the surface data SD is performed by a method different from the texture mapping process. Such a method will be described.

  FIGS. 44A to 44C are explanatory diagrams for explaining a method of setting color information in each surface data SD.

  In the color information setting process (step S1009), as shown in FIG. 16, the setting process of each object to the world coordinate system is completed, and the setting process to the visual field coordinate system of step S1006 and the clipping process of step S1007. Will be executed after Therefore, at the timing when the setting process of color information is executed, the coordinates and the direction of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are already set in a state of being converted to the visual field coordinate system.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the viewpoint VD serving as the reference of the visual field coordinate system is set, and the sea surface object PC19 is set to a position above the viewpoint VD. There is. That is, the sea surface display in the pachinko machine 10 is a display with the sea as the background, and is an effect that the sea surface is displayed in a state of looking up from the sea.

  When setting color information for each surface data SD, if the light source is temporarily above the sea surface object PC 19, the position of the viewpoint VD is determined by the relationship between the transmitted light from the light source and the coordinates and direction of the surface data SD. Surface data SD corresponding to the transmission of the light from the light source and the light from the light source all over the object for the sea surface PC 19 on the assumption that it becomes possible to visually recognize It distributes to surface data SD corresponding to not reflecting and transmitting.

  In this distribution, the light source is not set in the lighting process (step S1008) of the drawing process (FIG. 16), but depending on whether the angle of the surface data SD with respect to the viewpoint VD is less than a predetermined angle. The surface data SD is divided into one of the classification with many transmitted light and the classification with few transmitted light.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b-1) and (b-2), first, the surface data SD is viewed from the viewpoint VD using coordinate and direction data of the surface data SD. The angle of refraction, β, is calculated. In this calculation, a table in which refraction angle data is set corresponding to coordinates and direction data on a one-to-one basis is read out from the memory module 133 and used, but a program of calculation formula is prepared in advance. The refraction angle may be calculated by the calculation formula.

  Here, since setting of color information with respect to surface data SD is premised on the incidence of light from the atmosphere to the sea surface, the larger the refraction angle β, the larger the incident angle α, and the larger the incident angle α, the light quantity Will be less. On the premise of this, after calculating the refraction angle β, the VDP 135 determines whether the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle. Then, when the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44 (b-1)), the surface data SD causing the refraction angle β is classified as having many transmitted light, and the refraction angle β If the angle is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44 (b-2)), the surface data SD that causes the refraction angle β is classified as having less transmitted light. By the way, as in the case of having a component in the direction facing the opposite side to the viewpoint VD side, all surface data SD not having a direction facing the component facing the viewpoint VD side is classified as having little transmitted light. Be done.

  After the classification as described above, color information of each surface data SD is determined using a color table CT as shown in FIG. The color table CT is stored in advance in the memory module 133, and a plurality of color NO. And the color NO. The color information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the data of. Further, in the color table CT, correlation data to be referred to when deciding which color information to apply to the surface data SD is set.

  In this case, color NO. "7" is applied to the surface data SD classified into the small amount of transmitted light. On the other hand, color NO. “1” to “6” are applied to the surface data SD classified into the above-mentioned large amount of transmitted light, and plural types of color information are set to the surface data SD of the classification. . Which color information is to be set for the surface data SD of the classification is not determined by the direction of the surface data SD, but is determined by the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD.

  Specifically, with the vertex data of one corner portion (for example, the lower left corner when viewed in the state of FIG. 38A) of the surface data SD as reference vertex data, data of the Z coordinate of the reference vertex data is If it is equal to or less than the first-stage threshold “Z1” (ie, if the Z coordinate is closer to the viewpoint VD than “Z1”), “CL1” is selected as color information, and the first-stage threshold “ If the color information is larger than Z1 and smaller than or equal to the second stage threshold "Z2", "CL2" is selected as color information, and the third stage is larger than the second stage threshold "Z2". When the threshold value is "Z3" or less, "CL3" is selected as color information. Then, similarly, "CL4" and "CL5" are selected correspondingly to the range of each threshold, and the data of the Z coordinate of the reference vertex data is larger than the threshold "Z5" of the fifth stage. In the case, "CL6" is selected as color information.

  The color information “CL1” to “CL6” are set to be darker toward the rear side. Specifically, the color information “CL1” is set as white and the color information “CL6” is dark blue The color information "CL2" to "CL5" are set as their intermediate colors. The color information "CL7" is set as a darker color than the color information "CL6", and more specifically, is set as blue close to black.

  The specific processing configuration for setting color information to each surface data SD will be described below.

  FIG. 45 (a) is a flowchart showing the color information setting process for sea surface display performed by the VDP 135. The color information setting process for sea surface display is executed in the color information setting process of step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the color information setting process for sea surface display is started when either of the sea surface display start designation information and the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2701, the application counter is initialized. In this processing, the application counter has a role of specifying, using the VDP 135, surface data SD to which color information is to be set, and is included in the sea surface object PC 19 when the application counter is initialized. Numerical information corresponding to the number of plane data SD is set in the application counter.

  In the following step S2702, the sea surface object PC 19 recognizes orientation data from surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter, and in step S2703 calculates the refraction angle from the grasped orientation data. Then, in step S2704, it is determined whether the calculated refraction angle is greater than or equal to the reference angle.

  If the angle is equal to or greater than the reference angle, color NO. The color information ("CL7") of 7 is set for the plane data SD that is currently targeted. On the other hand, if the angle is less than the reference angle, the data of the Z coordinate of the surface data SD that is currently targeted is read out in step S2706, and collated with color table CT in step S2707. . Color information (any one of “CL1” to “CL6”) is set for the surface data SD that has been targeted this time.

  After executing the processing of step S2705 or step S2707, the application counter is set so that the target for setting color information shifts to the next surface data SD by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter in step S2708. Update the numerical information of. Thereafter, in step S2709, it is determined whether the numerical information of the application counter after the update indicates that setting of color information for all plane data SD is completed, that is, the numerical information of the application counter is " It is determined whether it is "0".

  If a negative determination is made in step S2709, the process returns to step S2702, and the processes of step S2702 to step S2708 are performed on new surface data SD. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, the present color information setting process is ended.

  FIG. 45 (b) is a flow chart showing the sea level adjustment process performed by the VDP 135. The adjustment process for the sea surface is executed in the drawing data creation process for background in step S1010 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). More specifically, although omitted in FIG. 27 and the description is omitted, the processing is executed between step S1802 and step S1803. That is, after the three-dimensional image data for background is converted into two-dimensional image data, the adjustment process for sea level is executed.

  First, in step S 2711, it is determined whether any one of sea surface display start designation information and sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list. If none of them has been set, the present adjustment processing ends. If one of the settings is set, the sea level blurring process is performed in step S2712, and the adjustment process ends.

  In the sea surface blurring process, a blurring process using a Gaussian filter is performed on the background two-dimensional image data created using the hidden surface process (step S1802). Specifically, one pixel is extracted from the area corresponding to the sea surface display, and a predetermined number (for example, five) of pixels are extracted on both sides of the pixel in the X axis direction. Thereafter, weighting according to the distance from the central pixel is determined using a Gaussian function, and blending (composition) of color information of each pixel is performed with the determined weighting applied. Similarly, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of pixels are extracted on both sides in the Y-axis direction around the same pixel. Thereafter, a weighting according to the distance from the central pixel is determined using a Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended while applying the determined weighting. And the blurring process using the said Gaussian filter is performed with respect to all the pixels which comprise the area | region corresponding to sea surface display.

  Next, the contents of the sea surface display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface display, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory diagram for simply explaining the setting mode of the color information of the area where the sea surface display is performed. .

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the background in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed, an image showing the sea is displayed. A sea level display SP is made at the top of this background. In this case, the orientation of the surface data SD for displaying the sea surface is finely controlled, and color information according to the finely controlled state is set, whereby the orientation of the sea surface is finely represented. Transmission of light from the atmosphere to the sea is represented realistically. Therefore, it is possible to perform realistic sea surface display SP.

  Further, since the direction of each surface data SD is adjusted after setting the form of the first stage of the sea surface object PC19, the large movement of the sea surface is regular, and the regular large movement is Irregularity can be given to the direction of each surface data SD.

  Further, when controlling the movement of each surface data SD individually, it is not necessary to individually change the direction of each surface data SD by calculation, by using the normal map data ND1 and ND2. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while reducing the processing load. In particular, by changing the position of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 in the world coordinate system, the unit normal data UND associated with each surface data SD is changed as the sea surface display SP progresses, When the direction of the surface data SD is complicatedly changed with the progress of the sea surface display SP, the same normal map data ND1, ND2 can be used and the same application processing can be used, so that the storage capacity And processing load can be reduced.

  Further, rough determination of movement using the animation data for sea surface is executed by the display CPU 131, and determination of fine surface orientation using the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is executed by the VDP 135. And distribution of processing load.

  Also, as described above, by performing the blurring process on the sea surface, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the pixel PS (the pixel on the left side to which color information corresponding to the light transmission is hardly set) A pixel PS (center side) obtained by blending the color information of both pixels PS between the pixel PS (right side pixel PS) for which the color information corresponding to the most light transmission is set. Pixel PS) will be present. As a result, in the configuration in which color information is individually set in the area where the sea surface display SP is performed, it is possible to make the boundary of the portion where the color information is different inconspicuous.

  Further, since the blurring process is performed after the two-dimensional image is formed, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the blurring process is performed in the state of the three-dimensional image.

<Another form of color information setting process for sea surface display>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining another mode of the color information setting process for sea surface display executed by the VDP 135.

  First, in step S2801, the process of initializing the application counter is executed as in step S2701. In the following step S2802, as in the case of the above-mentioned step S2702, the data for direction is grasped from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the sea surface object PC19, and in the same manner as the above step S2703 in the step S2803 The refraction angle is calculated from the data of the orientation that has been grasped.

  In the following step S2804, color information is derived from the information on the refraction angle calculated in the above step S2803. In this case, when the color information is derived, a color table in which the information on the refraction angle and the color information are associated is read from the memory module 133, and the color information corresponding to the information on the refraction angle is read. That is, in the present embodiment, color information is read directly from the information of the refraction angle.

  Thereafter, in step S2805, data of the Z coordinate of the surface data SD that is currently targeted is read, and in step S2806, adjustment processing of color information corresponding to the read data of the Z coordinate is executed. In this case, a process is performed in which the shift amount in the case of shifting the color information set in step S2804 to the darker side becomes larger as the surface data SD exists at a distance farther from the viewpoint VD.

  In the subsequent step S2807, the numerical information of the application counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter so that the target for setting the color information shifts to the next plane data SD. Thereafter, in step S2808, it is determined whether the numerical information of the application counter after the update indicates that setting of the color information for all plane data SD is completed, that is, the numerical information of the application counter is " It is determined whether it is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the process returns to step S2802, and the processes in steps S2802 to S2807 are performed on new surface data SD. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the present color information setting process is ended.

<Other embodiment>
The number of unit normal data UND included in one normal map data ND1, ND2 may be equal to or less than the number of plane data SD included in the sea surface object PC19. In this case, the unit normal data UND may be made to correspond to all the surface data SD by arranging a plurality of identical normal map data ND1 and ND2.

  The plurality of types of normal map data ND1 and ND2 need not be set, and a single set of normal map data may be set. In this case, in the sea surface display, only the single normal map data may be applied to the sea surface object PC 19. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the direction of each surface data SD along with the progress of sea surface display by changing the position of the normal map data applied to the sea surface object PC 19. In addition, by simultaneously reading out a plurality of the single normal map data and making the positions to be applied to the sea surface object PC 19 different from each other in the plurality of normal map data, complex surface orientation can be controlled. It may be configured to

  The target to which the unit normal data UND of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied is limited to a configuration in which a plurality of surface data SD sharing the same vertex data are not simultaneously applied. However, the unit normal data UND may be applied to the entire surface data SD. However, in the present configuration, different coordinates are simultaneously set for one vertex data, so it is necessary to separately adjust the coordinates. For example, the priority at the time of coordinate setting of vertex data is determined in advance between adjacent surface data SD, and unit normal data UND is applied as it is to surface data SD having a high priority, and a surface with low priority For the data SD, while maintaining the coordinates of the vertex data determined by the surface data SD having a high priority, approach the direction determined by the unit normal data UND applied to itself rather than the state of the first stage form It is good also as composition adjusted.

  The setting of color information for each surface data SD is not limited to the setting method using the color table CT or the setting method shown in FIG. 47, and, for example, the lighting of the drawing process (FIG. 16) The virtual light source may be set on the opposite side of the viewpoint VD across the sea surface object PC 19 in the process, and the transmission amount of light from the virtual light source may be individually calculated for each surface data SD. In this case, color information corresponding to the transmission amount of light may be derived using predetermined table information, and color information of the derivation result may be set in each surface data SD. In addition, initial color information may be set in advance for each surface data SD, and the color information may be adjusted in relation to the calculated transmission amount.

  The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the sea surface object PC19 is set above the viewpoint VD, and the sea surface object PC19 may be configured below the viewpoint VD. In this case, after the direction of each surface data SD is determined according to each of the above methods, bright color information is set if the direction of each surface data SD is a direction that easily reflects light, and the direction of each surface data SD is Dark color information is set if the light is easily transmitted. At the time of this setting, table information prepared in advance may be used, or it may be configured to actually calculate using a virtual light source.

  The brightest color information may be set for the surface data SD whose derived refraction angle is equal to or less than a predetermined angle, regardless of the distance from the viewpoint VD in the Z-axis direction. Also, instead of this, for surface data SD whose derived refraction angle is equal to or less than a predetermined angle, color information brighter than in the case of other refraction angles is set, and from the viewpoint VD The color information may be adjusted so as to be darker as the distance in the Z-axis direction of the image is longer.

  The processing configuration for setting the color information by controlling the direction of the surface as described above does not have to be the sea surface, and may be another water surface such as a river or a pond. In addition, when expressing a transparent film or a reflective film that changes the state of the surface with time, a processing configuration may be applied in which the orientation of the surface as described above is controlled to set color information.

  The target of the parameter controlled using map data is not limited to the orientation or coordinates, and may be the color of the surface or the transparency value of the surface.

  The number of unit normal data UND included in the normal map data ND1, ND2 may be smaller than the number of surface data SD included in the sea surface object PC19. In this case, one normal map data ND1, ND2 is applied to a predetermined number of surface data SD in the sea surface object PC19, and the same normal map data ND1, ND2 is again applied to the remaining surface data SD. Apply it.

  In the normal parameter setting process (FIG. 43), the process of step S2606, that is, the adjustment process of the adjacent plane data may not be performed. In this case, with regard to the buffer surface data SD2, among the plurality of vertex data possessed by the surface data SD2, the vertex data shared with the surface data SD1 of the application target is in accordance with the application of the normal map data ND1, ND2. The changed but not shared vertex data maintains the coordinates set in the form of the first stage. Even in this case, the direction and the size of the buffer surface data SD2 are changed according to the change of the direction and the size of the application target surface data SD1.

  In place of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 for directly controlling the direction of the surface data SD, map data for directly controlling the coordinates of each vertex data of the sea surface object PC 19 may be used. In this case, by applying the map data to the sea surface object PC19, the coordinates of the vertex data are changed, and as a result of the change, the direction of the surface data SD is changed. In the case of this configuration, since the control target is not a surface but a vertex, it is possible to separate the surface data SD1 to be applied and the surface data SD2 for buffer as in the case where normal map data ND1 and ND2 are used. There is no need to do it. The control amount of each vertex data set in the map data is preferably a change amount from the coordinates in the first stage form.

  The configuration in which the sea surface object PC 19 is divided into a plurality of surface data groups is not essential, and such a configuration may not be made. In this case, the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 is individually controlled using the normal map data ND1, ND2 and the like.

  -Setting of the form of the first stage based on performing control in plane data group units at the same update timing, and individual control of the direction of plane data SD using normal map data ND1, ND2, etc. The configuration of the first stage is not limited to the configuration in which both are performed, for example, at one update timing, and the individual control of the direction of the surface data SD is performed at the next and subsequent update timings. The configuration may be repeated. In this case, the processing load at one update timing can be reduced.

  The invention is not limited to the configuration in which color information is selected according to the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, and color information is selected in accordance with the distance from the viewpoint VD determined by the X, Y, and Z coordinates. It is good also as composition. Alternatively, instead of this, color information may be selected according to the distance from the viewpoint VD in the X axis direction, or may be selected according to the distance in the Y axis direction. Further, the color information may be selected according to the rotation position or the scale of the target object instead of the distance from the viewpoint VD.

<Configuration for Focus Display>
Next, a configuration for performing focus display will be described.

  Focus display exists at a predetermined position or range in the depth direction when multiple types of individual images on the display surface G are simultaneously displayed as if the positions in the depth direction of the display surface G are different from each other. Whether the image is in focus and the boundary of the pattern or the boundary of the curved portion, and the outer edge of the individual image are clearly displayed, but are present on the front side and the back side In the case of an individual image displayed as in (1), the display effect is displayed out of focus with the boundary of the pattern or the boundary of the curved portion, or the outer edge portion being blurred and blurred.

  Focus display is performed in the open / close execution mode in which the processing load required for image display is relatively low among the game play and the open / close execution mode. That is, during the game, it is necessary to perform the variable display of the symbols in accordance with the animation data predetermined in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 in the task processing of the display CPU 131 (FIG. 14). At least the process of step S 905 is performed. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode, since it is not necessary to perform the variable display of symbols in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, steps S903 and S904 are executed in the task processing of the display CPU 131 (FIG. 14). S 905 is not executed. Since the processing load of the display CPU 131 is reduced in the opening / closing execution mode by this amount, control for focus display is executed using the reduced amount.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing effect calculation processing in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the display CPU 131. The effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). The effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is activated when the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode is set.

  First, in step S2901, based on the currently set data table, an object for effect to be updated this time is grasped. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2901, the setting process (step S901) for control start of the object for effect is completed. In the subsequent step S2902, various parameters of the object for effect that are grasped are calculated to update information for control.

  In the following step S2903, the teaching object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. An object for teaching is an object used when displaying an image capable of teaching the player the situation of the game, and for example, if it is in a round, the current round is what number round The contents such as are taught using the teaching object (see FIG. 52). Further, information on the type of combination of symbols displayed on the effective line at the final stop in the game run which has triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is taught using an object for teaching (see FIG. 52). Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2903, the setting process (step S901) for control start on the teaching object is completed. In the following step S2904, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

  In the following step S2905, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is a focus rendering period in the open / close execution mode. The focus effect period is a period in which the focus display can be performed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect by the player. In the pachinko machine 10, a focus effect period is set as a partial period of the open / close execution mode, and specifically, a predetermined round such as a first round (that is, a period during which winning of the variable winning device 22 is possible) The focus production period is set to). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the focus effect period may be set for a plurality of rounds, and the focus effect period may be set in the opening and the ending, and the focus effect period is between rounds It may be set, a focus effect period may be set over a predetermined round and the next round, and the entire open / close execution mode may be set as a round effect period.

  When it is not the focus effect period (step S2905: NO), the present effect operation processing is ended as it is. As described above, when the effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes instructions for use of the effect object obtained in step S2901. Information is set along with information on usage instructions of textures corresponding to the objects. Further, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set, and, further, information on usage instruction of the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904, The calculated parameter is set.

  If it is a focus effect period (step S2905: YES), it is determined in step S2906 whether or not it is a focus selection period. In the focus effect period, a focus selection period is set in which the player can select a focus over a predetermined number of frames such as 300 frames from the start timing (a predetermined plurality of image update timings). The focus display execution period is set to be performed when the player selects a focus selection instruction based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 in the focus selection period. This pin and the display execution period are performed until the end of the round to be executed. Individual images that are subject to focus selection in the focus selection period will continue to be displayed in the focus display execution period that follows, so it is possible to execute focus display reflecting the result of focus selection in the focus selection period. It becomes.

  The focus display execution period is performed over a plurality of predetermined frame numbers (predetermined plurality of image update timings) such as at least 500 frames. Further, a predetermined round may be set as the focus selection period, and the subsequent rounds may be set as the focus display execution period.

  If it is the focus selection period (step S2906: YES), the parameter adjustment processing for focus selection is executed in step S2907, and the execution specification information for focus selection is stored in step S2908, and then the main effect is produced. The calculation process ends.

  As described above, when the effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes instructions for using the effect object obtained in step S2901. Is set together with the information on the usage instruction of the texture corresponding to those objects. Further, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set, and, further, information on usage instruction of the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904, The calculated parameter is set. Further, in the drawing list, a parameter for focus selection is set as a parameter of the object for effect grasped in the step S2901, and execution specification information for focus selection is set.

  Here, in the focus selection period, a display is provided that allows the player to recognize that the individual images enabling focus selection on the display surface G are gradually switched. For example, in a state where a plurality of individual images are simultaneously displayed as if they are arranged offset in the depth direction of the display surface G, the plurality of individual images are sequentially transitioned to the focus selectable state. Although the method of setting the focus selectable state is optional, for example, the annular portion is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the individual image, and the annular portion is blinked and displayed, the individual image is enlarged and displayed, and the individual image A configuration in which the image is enlarged after being enlarged or a configuration in which another image pointing to the individual image is displayed can be considered. The display of such a focus selectable state is executed by the VDP 135 referring to the focus selection parameter in a situation where the drawing list in which the focus selection execution designation information is set is output.

  In the pachinko machine 10, although the individual image for which focus selection is possible is an individual image for effect displayed in front of the background, an image of the background may be included.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the focus selection period (step S2906: NO), the process proceeds to step S2909. In step S2909, it is determined whether or not focus display is being performed. If focus display is not being performed, it is determined in step S2910 whether a focus instruction command has been received from the sound emission control device 60 or not. The focus instruction command is a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 at the end timing of the focus selection period when the player issues a focus selection instruction in the focus selection period, and the focus instruction command is The information of the individual image for which focus selection has been instructed is included.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2910, the present process ends. As described above, when the effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process makes a negative determination in step S2905 to end the main calculation process. The same information as in the case of

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, focus range calculation processing is executed in step S2911. In the focus range calculation process, a process of calculating a range to be focused is performed from the information of the individual image of the focus selection instruction target included in the focus instruction command. In this case, since the type of individual image displayed in the focus rendering period is already determined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the data of the focus range is made to correspond to the individual image to be the focus selection target. Is predetermined as a focus range table. Therefore, in step S2911, the focus range table is first read from the memory module 133, and data of the focus range corresponding to the individual image for which the focus selection instruction has been made is read. After that, in step S2912, after storing execution specification information of focus effect, the present calculation processing ends.

  As described above, when the effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes instructions for using the effect object obtained in step S2901. Is set together with the information on the usage instruction of the texture corresponding to those objects. Further, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set, and, further, information on usage instruction of the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904, The calculated parameter is set. Further, in the drawing list, data of the focus range calculated in step S2911 is set, and execution specification information of the focus effect is stored.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, the focus display is performed. The setting to the execution state of the focus display is performed, for example, by setting “1” to a flag for discriminating whether or not the focus display is in the data table. If it is determined that the focus display is to be performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2909, and after execution information for specifying a focus effect is stored in step S2912, the present operation processing is ended.

  As described above, when the effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes instructions for use of the effect object obtained in step S2901. Information is set along with information on usage instructions of textures corresponding to the objects. Further, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set, and, further, information on usage instruction of the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904, The calculated parameter is set. Further, in the drawing list, data of a focus range corresponding to the current focus effect is set, and execution specification information of the focus effect is set.

  The VDP 135 displays an image for a focus selection period and an image for a focus display execution period based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131. In this case, with regard to image display for the focus selection period, the individual images that are in the focus selectable state as described above are sequentially based on execution of the drawing process (FIG. 16) with reference to the focus selection parameters. An image display that switches is performed. On the other hand, image display for the focus display execution period is performed by executing processing for adjusting the focus after processing for transitioning from the state of three-dimensional image data to the state of two-dimensional image data is performed. .

  Hereinafter, a specific configuration for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 will be described. FIG. 49A is an explanatory diagram for describing each area of the VRAM 134 used to adjust the focus in the VDP 135. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 having a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b, and a Z buffer 143. Each of these buffers 142 and 143 is as already described, and each frame area 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 is drawing data which is two-dimensional data to be referred to when executing drawing on the symbol display device 31. And the Z buffer 143 is used to temporarily store coordinate data in the Z axis direction when performing hidden surface processing (FIG. 18).

  The VRAM 134 is provided with a blurring buffer 181 as an area for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 in addition to the buffers 142 and 143 described above. The blurring buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas as the frame areas 142a and 142b. That is, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b has the same number of unit areas, and the blurring buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas. The blurring buffer 181 can temporarily store the drawing list created in one frame area as it is.

  If the drawing list can be temporarily stored as it is, the number of unit areas in the blurring buffer 181 may be larger than the number of unit areas included in one frame area.

  The process for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 is executed in the drawing data combining process of step S1012 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart showing drawing data combining processing.

  In the drawing data combining process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not execution specification information of focus rendering is set in the current drawing list. If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S3002.

  In step S3002, the drawing data for background, which has already been created in the immediately preceding step S1010 and is stored in the screen buffer 144, is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time. After that, in step S3003, a frame area 142a in which the drawing data for the background and the rendering data for the effect and the symbol that were already created in the immediately preceding step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144 are written. , 142b, this combining process is finished.

  In this case, the rendering data for the effect and the symbol are written with reference to the α value as described above. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, no symbol exists in the rendering data for effect and symbol, and only data corresponding to the individual image for effect is present. Furthermore, in the open / close execution mode, rendering data for presentation and design includes data of individual images for teaching created based on pasting a texture for teaching to an object for teaching. For the data of the individual image for teaching, rendering data for effect and symbol is created so that data of other individual images does not overlap from the front side.

  On the other hand, if the focus rendering execution specification information is set in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S3004. In step S3004, similarly to step S3002, the drawing data for the background, which has already been created in the previous step S1010 and is stored in the screen buffer 144, is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time. In the following step S3005, the drawing data for background is written as described above for the rendering data for the effect and the symbol, which are already created in the immediately preceding step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144, as in step S3003. Write in the frame areas 142a and 142b. Thereafter, in step S3006, after the adjustment process for focusing effect is executed, the present combining process is ended.

  FIG. 50 (a) is a flowchart showing adjustment processing for focus effect.

  In the adjustment process for focus effect, first, in steps S3101 to S3107, a blur map generation process for generating blur map data to be referred to for performing focus effect is executed. The blurring map data is two-dimensional image data, and in the drawing data, the color information set in each unit area of the frame areas 142a and 142b in which the drawing data is created is in the situation of three-dimensional image data It is map data for specifying in VDP 135 whether or not it has coordinates in the Z-axis direction. That is, it is data in which coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each unit area of the frame areas 142a and 142b.

  Here, as already described, the drawing data for background and the drawing data for effect and symbol set the respective objects in the world coordinate system in the drawing process (FIG. 16) (steps S1002 to S1004). After the conversion process to the camera coordinate system (step S1005), the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system (step S1006) is executed, and in that state, the clipping process (step S1007), the lighting process (step S1008) and the color After the information setting process (step S1009) is performed, it is created. In this case, since each drawing data is created for the frame areas 142a and 142b, the setting process of color information is performed in the visual field coordinate system as described above when the drawing data is created. The state of the data is maintained, and is maintained until a new drawing process is started even after the drawing data is created. Then, blur map data is created using data in a state in which setting processing of color information has been performed in this visual field coordinate system.

  In the blur map creation processing, blur map data is created based on the processing similar to the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) using the Z buffer 143. However, in the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18), drawing data for the background is created with only image data for the background being processed, and drawing data for the representation and the design is processed only for the drawing data for the rendering and the pattern. Although the configuration is to create, in the blur map creation processing, all image data clipped in the visual field coordinate system are collectively treated as a processing target without performing such distinction.

  More specifically, first, in step S3101, the blurring map creating process is an individual image included on the Z axis with reference to the current projection target dot in the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17). Understand the Z value set in the target pixel of the individual image that is the test target. In the following step S3102, the Z-buffer 143 grasps the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the drawing target dot on a one-to-one basis.

  In the following step S3103, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S3101 corresponds to the near side in the Z axis direction than the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S3102. If it corresponds to the near side, step S3104 follows and the Z value grasped in step S3101 is overwritten on the dot area referred to in step S3102 in the Z buffer 143. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3105.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the front side is not supported, the process advances to step S3105 without executing the process of step S3104. That is, the Z buffer 143 is not updated when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or on the far side in the Z axis direction. . On the other hand, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the near side in the Z axis direction with respect to the Z value already set to the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated.

  In step S3105, it is determined whether the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S3101, and a Z test is performed on a new target pixel.

  If it has been completed, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the Z test has been completed for all the dots in the screen area PC12. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S3107, and then the process returns to step S3101 to perform the Z test on a new projection target dot. If it is completed, it means that the creation of the blurring map data is completed, so the process proceeds to step S3108.

  As described above, by creating the blurring map data, the VDP 135 specifies which coordinate the color information corresponding to each unit area of the composite drawing data has in the Z-axis direction. Is possible. Therefore, the relative positional relationship in the depth direction can be specified by the VDP 135 for color information corresponding to each unit area.

  In the adjustment processing for focus effect, after the blurring map data is created in steps S3101 to S3107, the process proceeds to step S3108.

  In step S3108, the combined drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the drawing target by the processes of step S3004 and step S3005 in the drawing data combining process (FIG. 49B) is stored in the blurring buffer 181. In the subsequent step S3109, the data of the focus range set in the current drawing list is read out.

  Thereafter, in steps S3110 to S3117, the blurring process is executed based on the read data of the focus range. In the blurring process, a process of determining whether or not the blurring process is to be performed is executed for the unit areas in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time, and for the unit areas determined to be the execution object. A process of causing blurring is performed, and further, these processes are performed on all unit areas included in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time.

  Here, the process of causing blurring is not performed for a unit area in which the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponds to the focus range, but the focus range corresponds to a single coordinate data in the Z-axis direction. Instead, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), it corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous in the Z-axis direction. That is, the focus range is set to have a certain depth of field, so that the image displayed on the display surface G is not too blurred. Although the focus range is specifically arbitrary, it is set so as to be a range that can include the entire individual image for one rendering having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction in the state of three-dimensional image data. Is preferred.

  For unit areas in which coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is out of the focus range, the degree of blurring is set to increase as the distance from the focus range increases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range are set so that the degree of blur gradually increases with distance from the focus range. It is set.

  The first blurring range is set to be continuous from the focusing range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous to the side away from the focusing range in the Z-axis direction. The first blurring range is present on both the far side and the near side of the focus range. The second blurring range is set so as to be continuous from the first blurring range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous on the side away from the focusing range and the first blurring range in the Z-axis direction. The second blurring range is present both on the further back side of the far side first blurring range and on the further front side of the first blurring range on the near side. Further, the third blurring range is set to be continuous from the second blurring range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous to the focusing range, the first blurring range, and the second blurring range in the Z axis direction. doing. The third blurring range is present both on the further back side of the second blurring range on the far side and on the further front side of the second blurring range on the near side.

  Although the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range are specifically arbitrary, the whole of the individual images for effect having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction in the state of three-dimensional image data It is preferable that they are set so as to be in the range in which it can be included. In this case, the numbers of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction included in the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range are the same as each other, and the number of coordinate data is the same as the focus range. It may be different from the focus range, or may be different from each other. For example, the number of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction may be increased as the blurring range is farther from the focus range.

  Since the focus range is changed based on the player's operation of the operation device 48 for effect, as described above, the data for the focus range stored in advance in the memory module 133 is included in the focus range. It is set as data of the number of coordinate data continuous in the Z-axis direction to be set. Then, based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect by the player, the coordinate in the Z-axis direction, which is a reference in setting the focus range, is determined, and Z included in the data for the focus range based on the coordinates. The focus range is set by converting the number of coordinate data in the axial direction as a range of actual coordinate data. In this case, it is preferable to set the coordinate in the Z-axis direction, which is the reference in setting the focus range, as the frontmost coordinate or the farthest coordinate of the focus range. By setting the coordinates as the frontmost side, the focus range can be set by simply adding the number of coordinate data set in the data for focus range to the reference coordinates. It becomes possible. In addition, even when the coordinate is set as the farthest side, the focus range can be obtained by simply subtracting the number of coordinate data set in the data for focus range from the coordinates serving as the reference. It becomes possible to set

  Similarly, with regard to the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range, the data for each blur range stored in advance in the memory module 133 is in the Z-axis direction to be included in the blur range. It is set as data of the number of continuous coordinate data. Then, based on the focus range determined as described above, the reference coordinates of each blur range are determined, and by applying data for each blur range to the reference coordinates, each blur range is determined. It becomes possible to set.

  As described above, although the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range can be set for each of the front side and the back side of the focusing range, the focusing range is the player's It is determined based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. Then, the focus range may be set to correspond to the individual image for effect that is present on the foremost side. In this case, each blurring range is set only on the far side with respect to the focusing range.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 50A, in the blurring process, first, in step S3110, coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to the current unit area is read out from the blurring map data created in steps S3101 to S3107. In the following step S3111, it is determined whether the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read out in step S3110 is included in the focus range read out in step S3109. If it is included in the focus range, it is not necessary to execute the process of causing blurring for the unit area, and the process advances to step S3116 without executing the process of steps S3112 to S3115.

  If it is not included in the focus range, it is determined in step S3112 whether or not the current unit area corresponds to the teaching area for displaying the individual image for teaching. The teaching individual image is an image displayed using the teaching object described above. If it corresponds to the teaching area, the process proceeds to step S3116 without executing the process of steps S3113 to S3115. That is, the process of causing blurring is not performed on the individual image for teaching. As a result, even when focusing is performed, it is possible to preferably teach information using an individual image for teaching.

  Incidentally, since the position where the individual image for teaching is displayed is unchanged regardless of the operation mode of the operation device for effect 48 by the player, the address of the unit area included in the teaching area is determined in advance. The data is stored in advance in the memory module 133.

  When negative determination is carried out in step S3112, it progresses to step S3113. In step S3113, the process of determining the blurring range is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read out in step S3110 is included in the first blur range, the second blur range, or the third blur range, and the blur is generated. Decide the target blurring range with. Thereafter, in step S3114, blurring generation processing is executed.

  The blurring generation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51 (a).

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether the first blurring range is determined in step S3113. If the first blurring range is determined, the first predetermined number of unit areas are identified in each of the X-axis directions with reference to the current unit area in step S3202, and the color is selected from each of those unit areas Extract information. This extraction is performed not from the frame areas 142a and 142b currently being drawn, but from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3202, the color information set in the unit area of this time is also extracted, but this extraction is also performed from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the following step S3203, blur generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. In the blurring generation processing, blurring is generated using a Gaussian filter. That is, weighting based on the distance in the X-axis direction from the unit area centered on the unit area that is the center is determined using the Gaussian function for each extracted unit area, centering on the unit area that is the current target The color information of the unit area centered on the center and the color information of the extracted unit area are blended while applying the determined weighting. The color information of the blend result is temporarily stored in the register 153.

  In the following step S3204, a first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the Y axis directions with reference to the current unit area, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3204, the color information set in the current unit area is also extracted, and this extraction is also performed from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the following step S3205, blurring generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. In the blurring generation processing, blurring is generated using a Gaussian filter. That is, weighting based on the distance in the Y-axis direction from the unit area centered on the unit area that is the center is determined using the Gaussian function for each of the extracted unit areas, centering on the unit area that is the current target The color information of the unit area centered on the center and the color information of the extracted unit area are blended while applying the determined weighting. The color information of the blend result is temporarily stored in the register 153.

  Thereafter, in step S3206, blending processing is performed. Specifically, the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3203 and the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3205 are blended at the same ratio. Thereafter, the main blurring generation process is ended.

  By performing the blurring generation processing as described above, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-1), the first predetermined number is provided on both sides in the X-axis direction with reference to the unit area being the current target. Each color information set in the minute unit area and each color information set in the unit areas for the first predetermined number on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the unit area that is the target of the current time Blended to information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not the second blurring range has been determined in step S3113. When the second blurring range is determined, in step S3208, a second predetermined number of unit areas larger than the first predetermined number are specified in each of the X-axis directions with reference to the current unit area. The color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3208, extraction of color information set in the unit area of this time is performed from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the following step S3209, blur generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific content of this process is the same as that of step S3203.

  In the following step S3210, a second predetermined number of unit areas larger than the first predetermined number are specified in each of the Y-axis directions with reference to the current unit area, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3210, extraction of color information set in the unit area of this time is performed from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the following step S3211, blurring generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific content of this process is the same as that of step S3205.

  Thereafter, in step S3212, the blending process is performed. Specifically, the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3209 and the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3211 are blended at the same ratio. Thereafter, the main blurring generation process is ended.

  By performing the blurring generation process as described above, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-2), the second predetermined number is provided on both sides in the X-axis direction with respect to the unit area which is the current target. Each color information set in the minute unit area and each color information set in the unit areas for the second predetermined number on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the unit area that is the target of the current time Blended to information. In this case, the number of unit areas to be blended is greater than in the case of FIG. 51 (b-1), so the degree of blurring is larger in the second blurring range than in the first blurring range. Become.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3207, this means that the third blurring range has been determined in step S3113. When the third blurring range is determined, in step S3213, a third predetermined number of unit areas larger than the second predetermined number are specified in each of the X axis directions with reference to the current unit area. The color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. Also, in step S3213, extraction of color information set in the unit area of this time is performed from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the following step S3214, blurring generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific content of this process is the same as that of step S3203.

  In the following step S3215, a third predetermined number of unit areas larger than the second predetermined number are specified in each of the Y axis directions with reference to the current unit area, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3215, extraction of color information set in the current unit area is performed from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the following step S3216, blurring generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific content of this process is the same as that of step S3205.

  Thereafter, in step S3217, blending processing is performed. Specifically, the color information of the blending result calculated in step S3214 and the color information of the blending result calculated in step S3216 are blended at the same ratio. Thereafter, the main blurring generation process is ended. By executing the blurring generation process as described above, it is possible to make the degree of blurring larger than in the case of the second blurring range.

  Returning to the description of the adjustment process for focus effect (FIG. 50A), after performing the blurring generation process in step S3114, the color information of the result calculated in the blurring generation process in step S3115 is After overwriting the current unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, the process proceeds to step S3116. As a result, color information in a state corresponding to each blurring range is set in the unit area.

  Here, in the configuration in which color information as a result of blurring is sequentially set in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, in the blurring generation process, the frame areas 142a and 142b are as described above. The color information is read out from the blurring buffer 181 instead of the color information read out from the. As a result, when blurring is generated in a predetermined unit area, it is possible to prevent the use of color information as a result of causing blurring. Therefore, it is possible to cause blurring in a manner that does not depend on the order in which the blurring generation processing is performed.

  In step S3116, it is determined whether all unit areas in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time are to be subjected to the processes in steps S3110 to S3115. If the process has not been completed, the target unit area is updated in step S3117, and then the process returns to step S3110, and the process of step S3110 to step S3115 is performed on a new target unit area. If it has been completed, the present adjustment processing is ended.

  Next, the contents of the focus display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which focus display is not performed, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which focus display is performed.

  In a state where the focus display is not performed, as shown in FIG. 52A, the individual images CH11, CH12, and CH13 for each effect, the image of the background (the image of the sea surface, the image of the sandy beach and the image of the sky) CH14 and The individual images CH15 and CH16 for each teaching are in a state of being in focus. Therefore, in each of the images CH11 to CH16, the border of the pattern, the border of the bent portion, and the outer edge portion are clearly displayed.

  On the other hand, in a state in which focus display is performed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the focus range of the individual image CH11 for effect and the image CH14 of the background of the sandy beach portion where the individual image CH11 exists Of the individual images CH12 and CH13 for the other effects and the image CH14 of the background of the other part, because they are out of the focus range. The border of the part, or the outer edge part is displayed in a blurred state and is unclear. In particular, the degree of blurring is greater as the images are displayed farther from the individual image CH11 for effect included in the focus range to the near side and the far side in the depth direction of the display surface G. ing. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the individual image CH11 for effect is in focus.

  However, even when focus display is being performed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching are clearly displayed as in FIG. 52 (a). As a result, even if focus display is performed, it is possible to favorably teach information using the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching. In addition, since the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching are displayed as if they are arranged in front of other images, they are excluded from the focus display targets even if they are excluded from the blur generation target It is possible to make the player who is performing the game clearly recognize, and to perform the focus display well.

  Further, at the time of the focus display, the blurring map data is not stored in advance in the memory module 133, but is created each time by the VDP 135. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity. In particular, by setting the focus range on the basis of the operation of the operation device 48 for effect by the player, in the configuration in which the player can actively participate in the game, the blurring map data is set in advance. If you try to keep it, the data capacity will be huge. In addition, in order to suppress the increase in data capacity, patterns of focus ranges selectable based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect are reduced. On the other hand, as described above, by creating the blur map data each time with the VDP 135, it is possible to suitably promote the player's active participation in the game while reducing the data capacity. It becomes.

  On the other hand, if the blurring map data is created as described above, the processing load of the VDP 135 is increased accordingly. On the other hand, when blurring is to be generated, it is necessary to execute complicated processing when averaging color information by performing it in the state of a two-dimensional image, not in the state of a three-dimensional image. Is eliminated, and the processing load on generation of blurring is reduced.

<Another form of focus display>
The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the blurring map data is created at the time of creating the drawing data, and the blurring map data may be stored in the memory module 133 in advance. In this case, if the focus range is selected based on the operation of the operation device for effect 48, it is necessary to create blur map data in advance corresponding to all the variations related to the selection. In addition, when the focus range is not selected based on the operation of the operation device for effect 48 and the blur display is performed in a certain mode, the blur map data according to the mode may be created in advance.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the blur map data is created in advance, the data set corresponding to each unit area in the blur map data does not have to be coordinate data in the Z axis direction, and the focus range, And it may be data which shows which range among each blurring range corresponds.

  The averaging process of color information to cause blurring does not have to be performed after converting three-dimensional image data into two-dimensional image data, and may be performed in the state of three-dimensional image data. In this case, when blending surrounding pixels with a reference pixel, the distance from the reference pixel to the surrounding pixels is calculated in a three-dimensional state, and weighting according to the calculation result Is applied to the color information of the surrounding pixels.

  The averaging process of color information to cause blurring may be configured to blend the extracted color information evenly, instead of performing weighting according to the distance from the center using a Gaussian function. In this case, although the realism of the blurred display is reduced, the processing load can be reduced.

  The averaging process of the color information for causing the blurring is not limited to the configuration performed in each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, and may be configured to be performed for only one of them. In this case, although the realism of the blurred display is reduced, the processing load can be reduced.

  The averaging process of color information for causing blurring is limited to a configuration in which the drawing data set in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b is separately stored in the blurring buffer 181. Instead, the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn may be used as they are. In this case, when blurring is caused for the color information of a predetermined unit area, the color information of the unit area that has already been caused to be blurred will be used, and the order of the processing for causing blurring affects the degree of blurring. Although it is not necessary to separately provide the blurring buffer 181, the storage capacity can be reduced, and there is no need to separately store the blurring buffer 181, thereby reducing the processing load. Be

  When creating the blur map data, a buffer other than the Z buffer 143 may be used. In this case, the VRAM 134 may be provided with a dedicated buffer for creating the blurring map data.

  -Instead of creating drawing data for background and drawing data for presentation and design separately and combining them to create drawing data for one frame, color information setting processing is performed in step S1009. After execution, one frame of drawing data may be collectively created. In this configuration, when the drawing data for one frame is generated using hidden surface processing, coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to each unit area is set in the Z buffer 143. Therefore, it becomes possible to use the data created in the Z buffer 143 in this hidden surface processing as the blurring map data as it is.

  -Focus display may be performed as an effect for game use. In this case, as in the case where the individual image for teaching is excluded from the blurring target as described above, the symbols variably displayed in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 may be excluded from the blurring target. In addition, if the focus display is to be performed as the effect during reach, the symbols forming the reach line may be excluded from the blurring targets on the symbol rows SA1 and SA3 that are stopped and displayed first. Additionally or alternatively, the symbols of the final stop symbol row SA2 may be excluded from blurring. By excluding the symbols forming the reach line, it is possible to use the focus display as the reach effect without reducing the distinguishability of the reach symbol type, and excluding the symbols of the final stop symbol row SA2 This makes it possible to use the focus display as a reach effect without reducing the identifiability of the symbols existing near the reach line in the final stop symbol sequence SA2.

  In addition, in the configuration where reach effect is performed using the focus display while the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are not displayed while displaying the image forming the reach line or the image teaching the type thereof, the reach line is formed. An image teaching a pattern or its type may be excluded from blurring. As a result, it is possible to use the focus display as a reach effect without reducing the identifiability of the reach symbol type.

  Further, when performing focus display as effects for game use, the target to be excluded from the blurring target may be other than the symbol, and for example, an image for teaching the number of the hold information on the display surface G is displayed If so, an image for teaching the number of the hold information may be excluded from blurring.

  Focus display may be performed in a configuration in which image display using two-dimensional image data such as sprite data is performed instead of image display using three-dimensional image data. In this case, when setting sprite data in the frame areas 142a and 142b, coordinate data corresponding to the depth direction of the display surface G is set in each sprite data, and the coordinate data corresponds to the focus range and each blurring range. Depending on which of them is included, it is possible to consider a configuration in which graying out is performed.

  The configuration for executing the processing of creating map data including parameter groups after setting image data in the world coordinate system may be performed for purposes other than focus display.

  For example, when displaying whether a predetermined area is blinking in an image for one frame, in a configuration in which either lighting or extinguishing is set according to the orientation of the surface of the object, the world coordinate system or the visual field coordinate system The orientation of each surface is read as a parameter in the state set to, and map data is created as data obtained by aggregating them. Then, on the drawing data after projection, color information may be processed based on the created map data to perform blinking display.

  Also, for example, when displaying a plane whose shape changes with time in the image of one frame, the color information to be set in each plane data is selected according to the direction of the plane of the object. The orientation of each surface is read as a parameter in the state set in the coordinate system or the visual field coordinate system, and map data is created as data in which the directions are collected. Then, surface display may be performed by processing color information based on the created map data with respect to the drawing data after projection.

<Configuration for Pattern Change Display>
Next, a configuration for performing pattern change display will be described.

  In the pattern change display, when the special character is displayed continuously over a plurality of frames (a plurality of image update timings), the outer edge shape of the special character is made the same, and the pattern is changed as the frame progresses. It is a display effect. However, the pattern is not simply changed, but for the change of the pattern of a part of the special character, the type of the first partial texture to be attached to the special object corresponding to the special character is switched. For other patterns of special characters, by changing the relative position of the second partial texture to the special object, while keeping the type of the second partial texture pasted to the special object the same, Change the pattern.

  The special object, the first partial texture, and the second partial texture will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c). FIG. 53 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the special object PC 20, and FIGS. 53 (b-1) to 53 (b-3) are explanatory views for explaining the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, FIGS. 53 (c-1) to 53 (c-4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the special object PC 20 includes a large number of polygons, is created as data corresponding to a three-dimensional shape, and has a plurality of part parts BP and AP1 to AP4. As the plurality of parts parts BP and AP1 to AP4, the main body parts BP and a plurality of attached parts parts AP1 to AP4 attached to the main body parts BP are provided. The special character is a character in which the eyebrow is applied to a human figure, the body part part BP corresponds to the face part and the body part, and each attached part part AP1 to AP4 corresponds to the hand part and foot part continuing from the body part doing.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (b-1) to (b-3), the main body part part BP displays a pattern of a face (pattern of an eye or a mouth) and whether the body is reflected by light. The first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are pasted to display an image including both of the patterns. These first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are set so as to be able to cover the entire main body part portion BP. Further, in the data for displaying the pattern of the face, the position (coordinates) of the main part part BP to which the data is to be attached is the same among the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. On the other hand, with respect to data for performing display as if the body is reflecting to light, the position (coordinates) of the main part part BP to which these data are to be attached is the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. There is a difference between them.

  That is, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 display data for displaying an invariant pattern in which the position to be attached in the main body part portion BP does not change and a change pattern in which the position to be attached in the main body part portion BP changes. The first partial textures PC21 to PC23 have a common data configuration for displaying an invariant pattern, but differ in data configuration for displaying a variation pattern.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 53 (c-1) to (c-4), the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 are patterns for displaying as if the hand or foot part is reflected by light. The second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are attached to display an image including. These second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the accessory parts AP1 to AP4, and further, one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 for one accessory parts AP1 to AP4. Only is provided. Each second partial texture PC <b> 24 to PC <b> 27 is set to be able to cover the corresponding attached part part AP <b> 1 to AP <b> 4. In this case, in each of the second partial textures PC <b> 24 to PC <b> 27, the pattern for producing the boundary portion is set to have continuity with the pattern for producing the boundary portion on the opposite side.

  The pasting of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 to the special object PC 20 is performed based on predetermined UV coordinate values. The UV coordinate values are as described above, and are stored in the memory module 133 in a state attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture, and each pixel of the image data for the texture is Can be made to correspond to each pixel of image data for an object on a one-to-one basis.

  When the special character is displayed, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to be attached to the body part part BP of the special object PC 20 are changed in a predetermined order. This order is set so that the manner in which the change pattern changes is continuous. On the other hand, one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 corresponding to each of the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 of the special object PC20 is to be attached, but the UV coordinates to be referred to when the attachment is performed The value is changed in a predetermined manner from the initial setting state. The change of the UV coordinate value is set such that the pattern in which each of the patterns corresponding to each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 changes has continuity.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing pattern change display using the special object PC20, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 will be described. The special object PC 20, the first partial textures PC 21 to PC 23, and the second partial textures PC 24 to PC 27 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for a special character executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation processing for the special character is executed in the calculation processing for effect in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14). In addition, the arithmetic processing for the special character is activated when the data table corresponding to the game times in which the special character is displayed is set.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the special character is being displayed. If the special character is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the special character display. If it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing is ended as it is, and if it is the start timing, the processing proceeds to step S3303.

  In step S3303, the special object PC 20 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S3303, in the setting process for control start immediately before (step S901), the process for control start on the special object PC 20 is completed. Also, information for control of the special object PC 20 for which control has been started is stored in the work RAM 132 until display of the special character is completed.

  In the following step S3304, an initial setting process of the first partial texture is executed. Specifically, among the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23, the first partial texture PC21 to which the order of use is initially set is specified, and use indication information of the first partial texture PC21 is stored. The data of the usage order of the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as table information.

  In the following step S3305, initialization processing of each second partial texture is executed. Here, in the case of changing the UV coordinate value of each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, the display CPU 131 derives the amount of change from the initial coordinate value in one-to-one correspondence with the respective second partial textures PC24 to PC27. And provides the VDP 135 with the derived amounts of change. The VDP 135 applies the provided data of each variation to the corresponding initial coordinate values. In this case, when viewed from one second partial texture PC24 to PC27, since the second partial texture PC24 to PC27 includes a large number of pixels, an initial coordinate value exists for each of the large number of pixels. There is. Therefore, the data of the change amount corresponding to the one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 is uniformly applied to each initial coordinate value of the one second partial texture PC24 to PC27.

  For example, in the situation where the initial coordinate value of a predetermined pixel constituting one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 is (U1, V1) and the initial coordinate value of the other pixel is (U2, V2), the change amount Of the predetermined pixel is set to (U1 + w1, V1 + w2), and the UV coordinate values of the other pixels are set to (U2 + w1, V2 + w2). Ru. Therefore, the relative positions of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 with respect to the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 are changed with the same directionality and the same amount of change. Since step S3305 is an initialization process, data corresponding to the absence of a variation is stored.

  The data of the change amount for changing the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 from the initial coordinate values is set as table information in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of the order of use. The table information is stored in advance in the memory module 133. Moreover, the said table information is separately set with respect to each 2nd partial texture PC24-PC27.

  Thereafter, in step S3306, the start designation information of the special character is stored, and in step S3307, various parameters are calculated for the special object PC 20, and the control information related to the special object PC 20 is updated. This arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the calculation process for the special character is executed, information on the use instruction of the special object PC 20 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the process in step S3304 is performed. The usage instruction information of the first partial texture PC 21 stored and stored, and the data of each amount of change derived in step S3305 are set. Furthermore, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S3307 is set, and the start designation information of the special character is set.

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the special character is being displayed, in step S3308, the special object PC 20 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

  In the following step S3309, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. The update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is set once in a predetermined plurality of first specific number frames, that is, once for a predetermined plurality of first specific number of image update timings. Furthermore, the update timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing, and from the predetermined first partial textures PC21 to PC23, the next first part The number of frames until the update timing of textures PC21 to PC23 (the number of image update timings) and the number of frames from the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to the next update timing of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 The number of image update timings) may be different.

  When it is not the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, in step S3310, the use instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in the previous processing cycle is stored as it is. On the other hand, if it is the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, use instruction information corresponding to the next first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is stored in step S3311.

  After executing the processing of step S3310 or step S3311, it is determined in step S3312 whether or not it is the update timing of the UV coordinate value to be applied to each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27. The update timing of the UV coordinate value is set once in a predetermined plurality of second specific number frames, that is, once for a predetermined plurality of second specific number of image update timings, and this update is further performed. The timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing, and from the predetermined UV coordinate value to the next UV coordinate value update timing and The number of frames (image update timing number) until the next UV coordinate value may be different from the frame number (image update timing number) until the next UV coordinate value update timing from the UV coordinate value.

  Further, the update timing of the UV coordinate value is synchronized with the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but may be asynchronous. In order to make it asynchronous, a configuration may be considered in which each update period is different. In this case, the update timing of the UV coordinate value may be a cycle shorter or longer than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. However, if the UV coordinate value is updated, the update cycle is shortened. However, in view of almost no influence on the data capacity, it is preferable to set the update timing of the UV coordinate value to a cycle shorter than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23.

  If it is not the update timing of the UV coordinate values, data of each variation stored in the previous processing cycle is stored as it is in step S3313. On the other hand, if it is the update timing of the UV coordinate value, data of each change amount in the next order is stored in step S3314.

  After executing the processing of step S3313 or step S3314, the continuation designation information of the special character is stored in step S3315, and various parameters are calculated for the special object PC 20 in step S3307, and the special object PC20 is processed. After updating the control information related to the above, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for the special character is executed, the information on the use instruction of the special object PC 20 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the above-mentioned step S3310 and The use instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in any one of step S3311 and the data of each variation stored in any of step S3313 and step S3314 are set. Furthermore, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated at step S3307 is set, and the continuation designation information of the special character is set.

  When VDP 135 receives a drawing list to display special characters, VDP 135 executes processing for setting special object PC 20 in the world coordinate system in setting processing (step S1003) for rendering in drawing processing (FIG. 16). Do. In this case, since the coordinates, scale, rotation angle, and the like at the time of setting in the world coordinate system are also specified in the drawing list, the special object PC 20 is set in a state in which these are applied. Further, since the special character is displayed as if it is displaced in a predetermined direction over a plurality of frames, the drawing list according to it is applied to VDP 135, and according to it, the special to the world coordinate system is made The setting of the object PC 20 is performed.

  When the VDP 135 receives a drawing list to display a special character, the first partial texture PC21 to PC23 is sent to the special object PC20 in the color information setting process (step S1009) in the drawing process (FIG. 16). And paste the second partial texture PC24 to PC27. The process which concerns on the said paste of a texture is demonstrated below.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing texture mapping processing for a special character. The special character texture mapping process is activated when either the start designation information of the special character or the continuation designation information of the special character is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S3401, use designation information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 set in the current drawing list is grasped. In the subsequent step S3402, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 corresponding to the use designation information grasped in step S3401 are read out from the memory module 133. Thereafter, in step S3403, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 read out in step S3402 are attached to the main part part BP of the special object PC20. Thus, the attachment of the texture to the main body part BP is completed.

  In the following step S3404, "4", which is information corresponding to the number of attached parts AP1 to AP4, is set in the attached parts counter provided in the register 153, and the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 corresponding to the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical value information of the current attached part counter are read from the memory module 133.

  In the following step S3406, data of initial coordinate values corresponding to attached part parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by numerical information of the present attached part counter is read out. In step S3407, among the data of the amount of change set in the current drawing list, the data of the amount of change corresponding to the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the present attached part counter is grasped. Then, in step S3408, the variation amount grasped in step S3407 is applied to the initial coordinate value read in step S3406 to derive the current UV coordinate value. Thereafter, in step S3409, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 read out in step S3405 are attached to the corresponding attached part parts AP1 to AP4 in accordance with the UV coordinate values derived in step S3408.

  In the following step S3410, the numerical value information of the attached part counter is decremented by 1, and it is determined in step S3411 whether the numerical information of the attached part counter after subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the process returns to step S3405, and the pasting process of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 in the above-described steps S3405 to S3409 is executed on the next attached part parts AP1 to AP4. If it is determined in step S3411 that the numerical value information of the attached part counter is "0", this texture mapping process is ended.

  Next, the contents of the pattern change display will be described with reference to FIG.

  56 (a) and 56 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the pattern change display.

  In the pattern change display using the special character CH17, as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b), a reach line is formed on a predetermined effective line during the game, and the final stop symbol row SA2 It is executed in the situation where the variation display of the symbol is done. In the pachinko machine 10, a pattern change display is performed as an effect for informing the player that the game time has a high expectation for becoming a transition trigger of the open / close execution mode. Note that the pattern change display using the special character CH17 may be generated with a predetermined probability only in the game round serving as the transition trigger of the open / close execution mode.

  In the pattern change display, the special character CH17 is displaced and displayed in a predetermined direction. In this case, with the displacement of the special character CH17, the pattern attached to the special character CH17 is changed. Specifically, the surface of the special character CH17 is illuminated and reflected by light, and the pattern is changed so that the reflected and brightened part is displaced. The change of the pattern occurs in each of the main body part part BP and each attached part part AP1 to AP4. On the other hand, the positions of the eyes and the mouth displayed on the special character CH17 are constant.

  As described above, for a part of the special object PC 20, a plurality of types of textures PC21 to PC23 are stored in advance, and the textures PC21 to PC23 to be attached are sequentially changed, while the special character While changing the UV coordinate values of textures PC24 to PC27 sequentially while setting the textures PC24 to PC27 for the other parts of CH17, pattern change display is performed while balancing the data capacity and the processing load. It is possible to do

  Also, for special characters, such as eyes and mouth, where there is a pattern whose relative position to the outer edge does not change, the pattern is not changed by switching the UV coordinate value of a single texture, By changing the textures by sequentially changing the textures PC21 to PC23, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the pattern of the relevant part.

  On the other hand, with regard to the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 of relatively small size, the pattern is changed by switching the UV coordinate values of the single textures PC24 to PC27, so that the UV coordinate values are changed. Even if the shape of the pattern is slightly deformed, it can be made inconspicuous.

<Another form of pattern change display>
-Instead of the configuration in which the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the respective accessory parts AP1 to AP4, the predetermined second partial texture is for the plurality of accessory parts AP1 to AP4. The second partial texture may be commonly used for all the attached part parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, the initial setting values of the UV coordinate values may be different from each other in changing the pattern aspect of each attached part portion AP1 to AP4.

  -The speed at which the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 to be attached in each attached part portion AP1 to AP4 are changed is not limited to the same configuration, and some of them are different The configuration may be different, or all may be different.

  The design may be such that a pattern is attached to straddle the main body part BP and at least one of the attached parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, when changing the appearance of the special character, the change of the straddling pattern when the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are changed such that the continuity of the pattern in the straddling portion is secured. It is preferable to associate the mode with the change mode of the straddling pattern when the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are changed.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) A configuration in which image data required to create drawing data is not read out from the memory module 133 at the required timing but read out to the VRAM 134 in advance of the required timing. It may be By performing such pre-reading, it is possible to preferably create drawing data. In particular, in the case where a NAND flash memory is used as the memory module 133, the time required for reading tends to be longer than that of the NOR flash memory. Therefore, the above-described pre-read configuration is applied to such a configuration. Then it is effective. In addition to or instead of image data used in the VDP 135, a program or data used in the display CPU 131 may be read out in advance.

  (2) A buffer for effect in which drawing data for effect is written and a buffer for symbol in which drawing data for symbol is written are separately provided, and the final generation data is generated for background The drawing data written in the buffer, the drawing data written in the effect buffer, and the drawing data written in the drawing data may be combined. Also, instead of this, there is a buffer in which drawing data for the first effect is created and a buffer in which drawing data for the second effect is created, and the drawing data for the first effect is for the background The composition of the drawing data may be performed such that the drawing data for the second pattern and the drawing data for the symbol are present and the second drawing data for the second effect is on the foreground.

  (3) When color information setting processing (step S1009) is performed, setting of color information such as pasting of a texture may be performed only on the projected surface. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, setting of color information such as texture mapping may be performed after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

  (4) Although the camera (viewpoint) is configured to be individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, instead of this, a single image is set for all image data arranged in the world coordinate system. The camera may be commonly set.

  (5) Although the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is configured to be projected in units of the background image, the effect image and the symbol image, it may be configured to be projected together in units of the background image and the effect image The image may be projected together in units of effect images and symbol images, or may be projected all together.

  (6) The hold information pertaining to the winning to the upper operation port 23 and the hold information pertaining to the winning to the lower operation port 24 are distinguished and stored, and the hold information pertaining to the winning to the lower operation port 24 has priority A configuration to be digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration may be applied to which priority-retaining information relating to winning of the upper operating port 23 is preferentially digested.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not vertically arranged side by side, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are on the left and right It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, and it is good also as a structure which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so as to aim for winning only to the first operation port or only to winning to the second operation port.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display section 33 is obtained based on the first display area displaying the result of the acceptance / rejection determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operation opening 23, and the winning of the lower operation opening 24. A second display area may be provided to display the result of the pass / fail judgment of the held information. In this case, the variation display of the pattern in the first display area is performed prior to or on the basis of the fact that the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the upper operation port 23 is the object of the acceptance or rejection determination. At the same time as the game start is started, the stop result corresponding to the determination of the success or failure is displayed, and the variable display of one game time is ended. In addition, the variation display of the pattern in the second display area is performed prior to or on the basis of the fact that the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the lower operation port 24 is the object of the acceptance determination. At the same time as it is started, the stop result corresponding to the judgment of success or failure is displayed, and the variable display of one game time is ended.

  (7) The player is in the case where the hold information pertaining to the winning of the upper operation opening 23 is the target of the determination of yes or no, and in the case where the hold information pertaining to the winning of the lower operation opening 24 is the target of the determination of yes or no The benefits from which they are obtained may be different. Moreover, in the structure which provides multiple operating ports like each said embodiment, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, Three or more may be sufficient. In addition, only one operation opening may be provided.

  (8) Based on the command output from the main control device 50 instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command output from the main control device 50, The display control devices 70 and 130 may control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices may be provided. The functions of the above may be integrated into the main control device 50, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated into the main control device 50. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 is also arbitrary.

  (9) Another type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the motorized part opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine which becomes a jackpot upon entering and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine provided with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  In addition, non-ball-ball type game machines, for example, a plurality of reels as a plurality of orbiting bodies in which a plurality of kinds of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction, start the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever A slot for giving a player a benefit such as payout of medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by operating the switch. The invention is also applicable to machines. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device separately from the reel, the present invention can be applied to the control related to displaying an image in the display control device. Is applicable.

  A pachinko machine and slot machine including a loading device and starting rotation of the reel by operating the start lever after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which is integrated.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of the image;
Equipped with
In the gaming machine, the data generation means generates the generation data based on applying image data and applying parameter data for determining a display mode of the image by the image data.
The data generation means
Deriving means for deriving the parameter data to be applied when an image group including a plurality of individual images is displayed on the display unit (function to execute the processing of step S2204, step S2208 and step S2212 in VDP 135, or step S2305 in VDP 135 , Step S2310, step S2317),
In the state where the parameter data derived by the deriving means is applied to specific image data (particle dispersion object PC 17), based on using the specific image data, the generated image is displayed on the display unit. Image group means capable of generating (function to execute the processing of step S2206, step S2210 and step S2214 in VDP 135, or function to execute the processing of step S2307, step S2313 and step S2319 in VDP 135),
Equipped with
The derivation unit is configured to use first parameter data (for example, first key data KD1) to be applied when displaying the image group at the first update timing, and a second update timing later than the first update timing. Using the second parameter data (for example, the second key data KD2) applied when displaying the image group, the image group is updated at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing. A game machine characterized by having specific derivation means (function to execute the processing of step S2208 in VDP 135 or function to execute the processing of step S2310 in VDP 135) for deriving specific parameter data to be applied when displaying .

  According to the feature A1, by displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images, display contents can be complicated, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit. Become.

  In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data The data capacity can be reduced in that there is no need to store in advance, and it is possible to secure continuity for each of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

  Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is the first parameter data and the second parameter as the specific parameter data. It is derived collectively using data. Thus, among the plurality of individual images included in the image group, the parameter data to be referred to for deriving the parameter data corresponds to the same update timing. Therefore, the processing load in deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A2. The image group includes a first individual image (for example, a particle single image PT1) and a second individual image (for example, a particle single image PT2),
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image, and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The specific derivation means is applied when displaying the second individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image using the first parameter data and the second parameter data. The gaming machine according to the feature A1, characterized in that the specific parameter data including the parameter data to be transmitted is derived.

  According to the feature A2, in each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data, parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group is present. Become. Thereby, in the configuration in which parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived collectively as specific parameter data, When the display modes of the first individual image and the second individual image are changed with the lapse of time, it is possible to make the changing aspect correspond to each individual image.

  Feature A3. The game according to the feature A1 or A2, wherein the specific deriving means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at a predetermined ratio. Machine.

  According to the feature A3, it is possible to derive specific parameter data while using the first parameter data and the second parameter data as they are.

Feature A4. The image group includes a first individual image and a second individual image,
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image, and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The specific derivation means is
A first specific parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, and a second applied when displaying the second individual image To derive the specific parameter data including two specific parameter data;
Also, in the case of deriving the specific parameter data at a specific update timing, the predetermined ratio in the case of deriving the first specific parameter data and the predetermined ratio in the case of deriving the second specific parameter data The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that and are identical.

  According to the feature A4, in each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data, parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group is present. Become. Thereby, in the configuration in which parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived collectively as specific parameter data, When the display modes of the first individual image and the second individual image are changed with the lapse of time, it is possible to make the changing aspect correspond to each individual image.

  Further, in the configuration for deriving the specific parameter data so as to include each parameter data corresponding to each individual image as described above, a predetermined ratio used when deriving the first specific parameter data corresponding to the first individual image, The predetermined ratio used when deriving the second specific parameter data corresponding to the second individual image is the same. As a result, it is possible to commonly use information of a predetermined ratio, and it is possible to reduce processing load as compared with a configuration in which the predetermined ratios are different.

Feature A5. Between the first update timing and the second update timing, there exist a plurality of update timings in which the display mode of the image group is changed,
The specific derivation unit is configured to perform the first parameter data and the second parameter at each of a plurality of update timings at which the display mode of the image group is changed between the first update timing and the second update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, wherein the specific parameter data is derived using data.

  According to the feature A5, instead of using the same specific parameter data in each of the plurality of update timings included between the first update timing and the second update timing, the specific parameter data is individually set in each of the update timings. Is derived, it is possible to derive parameter data so as to gradually approach from the first parameter data to the second parameter data. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the image group as a series.

  Further, since the parameter data used at each of the plurality of update timings is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the data capacity is larger than in the configuration in which the parameter data is stored in advance. Can be reduced. Furthermore, since the plurality of parameter data are both derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the type of parameter data to be referred to in deriving the plurality of parameter data is changed There is no need. Thus, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature A6. The specific derivation means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at a predetermined ratio,
The data generation means is a ratio determination means for determining the predetermined ratio when blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at each of the plurality of update timings (processing of step S2109 in display CPU 131) Function of executing the process of step S2309 in the VDP 135) or
When the ratio determining means determines that the amount of change of the predetermined ratio when one update timing comes to the next update timing at the plurality of update timings and the next update timing from the next update timing The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the determination is performed such that the amount of change of the predetermined ratio is the same.

  According to the feature A6, at each of the plurality of update timings between the first update timing and the second update timing, it is only necessary to change the predetermined ratio with a fixed amount of change, so the predetermined ratio is changed. The above configuration can be simplified.

Feature A7. In order to display an image at one update timing, a drawing instruction means (display CPU 131) for outputting drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information for specifying image data and parameter data to be applied to the image data is provided. ,
The display control means displays an image in accordance with the information instructed by the drawing instruction means.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A6, wherein the display control means includes the specific deriving means.

  According to the feature A7, since it is not necessary to derive the specific parameter data on the drawing instruction means side, the processing load of the drawing instruction means can be reduced.

  Feature A8. One of the features A1 to A7, wherein the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data include coordinate information for determining a position at which the image group is displayed. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to display an image in which the position of each individual image included in the image group changes while achieving the excellent effect as described above.

  Feature A9. The coordinate information corresponding to the specific parameter data is on a virtual straight line connecting the position determined by the first parameter data and the position determined by the second parameter data, the position of each individual image included in the image group The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized in that it is coordinate information to be made.

  According to the feature A9, when displaying the image group as moving from the position determined by the first parameter data to the position determined by the second parameter data, the image group moves on a straight line connecting both the positions Since it is only necessary to derive the specific parameter data, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of deriving the specific parameter data using the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

  Feature A10. The game according to any one of the features A1 to A9, wherein the deriving means derives the first parameter data and the second parameter data by reading from the storage means (memory module 133). Machine.

  According to the feature A10, since it is only necessary to read and use the first parameter data at the first update timing and read and use the second parameter data at the second update timing, the processing load at these update timings can be reduced as shown in FIG. Be On the other hand, at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing, since the specific parameter data may be derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, only parameter data is stored. Data capacity to save can be reduced. That is, according to the present configuration, it is possible to perform display using an image group while balancing both data capacity and processing load.

Characteristics A11. The data generation means arranges image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space Viewpoint setting means (function to execute the processing of step S1006 in VDP 135), and projecting the image data of the object on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and based on the data projected on the projection plane Setting means for generating the generated data (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135);
The specific image data corresponds to image data of an object, and the plurality of individual images included in the image group correspond to vertex data of image data of the object. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A10.

  According to the feature A11, in a configuration that enables realistic image display using three-dimensional information, it is only necessary to arrange one object in a virtual three-dimensional space when displaying an image group, thus reducing processing load. While it is possible to display an image group.

Feature A12. The arrangement means is a drawing instruction means (display CPU 131) that includes drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing and parameter data to be applied to the image data. By arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information based on the output by the), generation data corresponding to the drawing instruction information can be generated. To be
When the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction means includes use instruction information of the specific image data in the drawing instruction information.
The arrangement means is configured to display the image group by arranging the specific image data in the virtual three-dimensional space, when the drawing instruction information includes use instruction information of the specific image data. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the gaming machine is adapted to be capable of generation.

  According to the feature A12, in the case of displaying the image group, the drawing instruction means need only include the use instruction information on one object in the drawing instruction information, so that the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. As a result, the data volume of the drawing instruction information can be reduced.

Feature A13. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (The function to execute the processing of step S1006 in VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (rendering data (rendering data) based on the data projected on the projection plane And generation setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) for generating the generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) Memory means to store And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In the gaming machine provided with
The data generation unit is a derivation unit that derives parameter data to be applied when displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images on the display unit (a function of executing the processing of step S2204, step S2208 and step S2212 in VDP 135; Or step S2305, step S2310, step S2317) in the VDP 135,
The arrangement unit uses the specific image data in a state where the parameter data derived by the derivation unit is applied to the specific image data (object for particle dispersion (object PC 17)), the display unit displays the image group. Means for generating image data to be displayed (image function for executing steps S2206, S2210 and S2214 in VDP 135, or function for executing steps S2307, S2313 and S2319 in VDP 135) When,
Equipped with
The derivation unit is configured to use first parameter data (for example, first key data KD1) to be applied when displaying the image group at the first update timing, and a second update timing later than the first update timing. Using the second parameter data (for example, the second key data KD2) applied when displaying the image group, the image group is updated at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing. A game machine characterized by having specific derivation means (function to execute the processing of step S2208 in VDP 135 or function to execute the processing of step S2310 in VDP 135) for deriving specific parameter data to be applied when displaying .

  According to the feature A13, it is possible to display a realistic image using three-dimensional information, and further, to display an image group including a plurality of individual images, so that the display content can be complicated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit.

  In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data The data capacity can be reduced in that there is no need to store in advance, and it is possible to secure continuity for each of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

  Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is the first parameter data and the second parameter as the specific parameter data. It is derived collectively using data. Thus, among the plurality of individual images included in the image group, the parameter data to be referred to for deriving the parameter data corresponds to the same update timing. Therefore, the processing load in deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A14. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (The function of performing the process of step S1006 in VDP 135), and projecting the image data of the object on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating the generation data based on the data projected on the projection plane Generation data (drawing data) generated by a data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) having a drawing setting unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1010 to step S1012 in VDP 135) Memory means to store And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In the gaming machine provided with
The display control means is configured to simultaneously display an image group including a plurality of individual images by using specific generation data.
The image data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means for displaying the group of images is a specification in which each of the plurality of individual images included in the group of images is associated with each vertex data A game machine characterized in that it is image data of an object (particle dispersion object PC 17).

  According to the feature A14, realistic image display using three-dimensional information becomes possible. In this case, since it is sufficient to arrange one object in the virtual three-dimensional space when displaying the image group, it is possible to display the image group while reducing the processing load.

Feature A15. The arrangement means is a drawing instruction means (display CPU 131) that includes drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing and parameter data to be applied to the image data. By arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information based on the output by the), generation data corresponding to the drawing instruction information can be generated. To be
When the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction means includes use instruction information of image data of the specific object in the drawing instruction information.
The arrangement means displays the image group by arranging the image data of the specific object in the virtual three-dimensional space when the drawing instruction information includes use instruction information of the image data of the specific object. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein generation of generation data to be generated is enabled.

  According to the feature A15, in the case of displaying the image group, the drawing instruction means need only include the use instruction information on one object in the drawing instruction information, so that the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. As a result, the data volume of the drawing instruction information can be reduced.

  The invention of the feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, the display unit displays an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, it is considered possible to increase the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit by making the display direction of the individual image complicated or displaying a plurality of individual images simultaneously. However, when such an image is displayed, it is not preferable that the processing load extremely increases and the data capacity extremely increases.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably performing display effects while suppressing the processing load.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (The function to execute the processing of step S1006 in VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (rendering data (rendering data) based on the data projected on the projection plane And generation setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) for generating the generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) Memory means to store And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31) and updating the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. Display circuit 155),
In the gaming machine provided with
The image data of the object to be placed in the virtual three-dimensional space by the placement means has data capable of defining a plurality of faces, and a plurality of face data (face data SD) has a three-dimensional shape. Image data of a multi-faced object (sea surface object PC 19) that can determine
The data generation means
When the image data of the polyhedral object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space so as to display the polyhedral image corresponding to the image data of the polyhedral object over a plurality of update timings, the display mode of the polyhedral image is changed Arrangement mode changing means for changing the arrangement mode of at least a part of the plurality of plane data in the virtual three-dimensional space (function to execute arithmetic processing for sea surface display in display CPU 131, for sea surface display in VDP 135 Function to execute the setting process of
The color information to be applied to the surface data whose layout mode has been changed by the layout mode changing means is changed in units of the plane data according to the layout mode of the plane data, thereby at least one of the multiple plane images Display color changing means (function of executing color information setting processing for sea surface display in VDP 135) capable of displaying an image in which the display color of the area of the unit is different among a plurality of update timings;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the layout mode of at least a part of the plurality of plane data is changed, and the color information applied to the plane data of which the layout mode is changed is changed along with the change of the layout mode. Be done. This makes it possible to complicate the display effect, and to increase the player's interest in the display effect.

  Further, the change of the color information is performed in the plane data unit according to the arrangement mode of the plane data. As a result, even if a large number of textures are not stored in advance in accordance with the pattern in which the color information is changed, it is possible to set the color information according to the layout mode of the surface data. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in display effects while suppressing an increase in data capacity.

  Note that “the arrangement mode changing means changes at least one of the direction, the shape, and the size of at least a part of the plurality of plane data when the arrangement mode is changed” in the above configuration. included.

  Feature B2. The arrangement mode changing means changes the arrangement mode of the surface data of a part of the plurality of surface data, and makes the arrangement mode of the other surface data correspond to the change of the arrangement mode to the surface data of the part The gaming machine according to the feature B1, further comprising (a function of executing setting processing of a normal parameter in the VDP 135).

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to individually control the arrangement mode of the plane data while preventing the continuity between the plane data to be lost.

  Feature B3. The arrangement mode changing means changes a predetermined parameter which is at least one of an orientation, a shape, and a size of discontinuous surface data (surface data SD1 to be applied) in which corresponding regions in the multi-sided image are not continuous with each other. And means for correlating the predetermined parameter of surface data (surface data SD2 for buffer) continuous with a region corresponding to the non-continuous surface data in the multi-face image to the non-continuous surface data A game machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized by comprising (a function of executing setting processing of a normal parameter in the VDP 135).

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to individually control the arrangement mode of the plane data while preventing the continuity between the plane data to be lost. In particular, an object whose layout mode is to be positively changed is non-continuous surface data, and such surface data continuous to the non-continuous surface data is made to correspond to the non-continuous surface data to make such division. As compared with the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed without performing the process, the processing load required for the adjustment for securing the continuity between the surface data can be reduced.

In addition, as a more specific structure of the said feature B3,
"Each surface data is determined by a plurality of vertex data, and further, a plurality of predetermined surface data share some vertex data with each other,
The arrangement mode changing means changes a predetermined parameter which is at least one of an orientation, a shape, and a size of surface data (surface data SD1 to be applied) which does not share the vertex data with each other, and changes them A unit for correlating the predetermined parameter of the surface data (face data SD2 for buffering) sharing the target surface data and the vertex data with the surface data as the change target (a setting process of a normal parameter in the VDP 135 Have a function to execute)
It is possible to consider the configuration.

Feature B4. Each surface data is determined by a plurality of vertex data, and further, a plurality of predetermined surface data share some vertex data with each other,
The arrangement mode changing means is configured to change at least one of the direction, the shape, and the size of each of the surface data by individually changing the coordinates of each of the vertex data. The gaming machine described in B2.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to change at least one of the orientation, the shape, and the size of the plurality of surface data by changing the coordinates of one vertex data. As described above, by controlling parameters in units of vertex data instead of controlling parameters in units of plane data, even if a processing configuration for securing continuity between surface data is not set, it is possible to use plane data It becomes possible to control arrangement mode individually.

Feature B5. The arrangement mode changing means is
Data for reading out from the storage means (memory module 133) individual control data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) which makes it possible to individually change the arrangement mode of the plurality of plane data Reading means (function of executing step S2503 in VDP 135);
Application changing means for changing the mode in the case of applying the individual control data to the image data of the multi-faced object among the plurality of update timings (function to execute the processing of step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S2512 in VDP 135 )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, comprising:

  According to the feature B5, in the configuration in which the layout mode of the plane data is changed using the individual control data stored in advance, the display mode of the multi-plane image is changed between the plurality of update timings while using the individual control data It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while balancing the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature B6. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and the unit control data is applied to the surface data or data defining the surface data.
The application changing means changes the correspondence between the data to which the unit control data is to be applied and the unit control data in the image data of the multi-faced object in accordance with the switching of the update timing (VDP 135 The gaming machine according to the feature B5, characterized in that it comprises a function of executing the processing of step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S2512.

  According to the feature B6, since the display mode of the multi-face image is changed between the plurality of update timings by switching the correspondence between the data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data, the individual control data The processing load can be reduced in the configuration in which the display mode of the multi-face image is changed while using the

  Feature B7. The application changing unit reflects a plurality of unit control data contents on one data to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multi-faced object (steps S2506 and S2507 in VDP 135) , And a function of executing the processing of step S2511 and step S2512). The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6.

  According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed with reference to the unit control data, diversification of the arrangement mode to be changed is achieved.

Feature B8. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and the unit control data is applied to the surface data or data defining the surface data.
The data reading means reads a plurality of the individual control data from the storage means.
The application changing means is
A plurality of application means for reflecting the contents of each unit control data of the plurality of individual control data with respect to one data to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multi-faced object (step S2507 and step in VDP 135 Function to execute the process of S2512),
In the image data of the multi-faced object, the correspondence between the data to which the unit control data is to be applied and the unit control data is changed along with the switching of the update timing, and the change of the correspondence is made to the plurality of individual control data Correspondence change means (function of executing the processing of step S2506 and step S2511 in the VDP 135)
The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, comprising:

  According to the feature B8, the arrangement mode can be changed in a complicated manner while facilitating the design of the individual control data in the gaming machine design stage.

Feature B9. The arrangement mode changing means is
First changing means (a function for executing arithmetic processing for displaying a sea surface in display CPU 131, a function for executing steps S2504 and S2509 in VDP 135) for collectively changing the arrangement mode of a group of data including a plurality of surface data ,
Second changing means for individually changing the arrangement mode of each surface data included in the group of data whose arrangement mode has been changed by the first changing means (processing of step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S2512 in VDP 135) And the ability to perform
A game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8, comprising:

  According to the feature B9, it is possible to change the arrangement mode in plane data units in a complicated manner while changing the arrangement mode along the large flow.

  Note that, as a more specific configuration that causes such an operation and effect, “the type of the layout mode changed by the first changing unit is at least one of a position, an orientation, and a size, and the second change is The kind of arrangement mode changed by the means may include at least a part of the kind of arrangement object to be changed by the first changing means.

  In addition, “the image data of the multi-faced object includes a plurality of data of the group, and the first changing unit is configured to individually change the arrangement mode of the plurality of groups of data”. Conceivable.

Feature B10. The display color changing means is
Classification specifying means for specifying whether color information to be applied to the surface data is included in a predetermined classification according to the arrangement mode to be changed by the arrangement mode changing means (step S2702 to step in VDP 135 Function to execute S2705),
Color information for selecting color information to be applied to the surface data specified as being included in the predetermined classification by the classification specifying means from among color information of a plurality of stages based on parameters of a type different from the arrangement mode Selection means (function of executing step S2706 and step S2707 in VDP 135);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, comprising:

  According to the feature B10, the color information is determined based on the parameter different from the arrangement manner while changing the color information according to the arrangement manner, so that the color information can be set complicatedly. This makes it possible to realize realistic image display.

Feature B11. The arrangement mode changing means changes at least the direction of the surface data,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, wherein the display color changing means changes color information to be applied to the surface data based on an angle of the surface data with respect to the viewpoint. .

  According to the feature B11, it becomes possible to set color information in accordance with the orientation of the surface, and it becomes possible to realistically display a multi-sided image.

Feature B12. The display color changing means is
A section specifying means (step S2702 in VDP 135 for specifying whether color information to be applied to the surface data is included in a predetermined classification according to the direction of the surface data changed by the layout mode changing device) A function of executing step S2705),
Color information selection for selecting color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined segment by the segment identification means from among color information of a plurality of stages based on different types of parameters from the orientation Means (function of executing step S2706 and step S2707 in VDP 135),
The gaming machine according to feature B11, comprising:

  According to the feature B12, while color information is changed according to the orientation of the surface, color information is determined based on a parameter different from the orientation of the surface, so that color information can be set complicatedly. This makes it possible to display multi-faced images realistically.

  Feature B13. The color information selecting means is configured to apply color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined category by the category specifying means, based on the distance in a predetermined direction from the viewpoint. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the gaming machine is selected from among the above.

  According to the feature B13, the color information changes according to not only the orientation of the surface but also the position of the surface, so that it is possible to realistically display a multi-surface image.

  The invention of the feature B group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object which is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is pasted to the object. Generated data is generated by projecting an object to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of the image;
In the gaming machine provided with
The display mode of the image on the display unit includes a mode in which a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display unit. ,
The data generation means is an individual image displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present on the near side in the depth direction with respect to the predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the far side in the depth direction The target individual image, which is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present in the image, is contoured in comparison with the image recognized by the player as being present at the reference position. A gaming machine characterized by further comprising blurring setting means (function to execute adjustment processing for focusing effect in VDP 135) to be displayed in a blurred state when lines become unclear.

  According to the feature C1, it is possible to perform display effect as if the reference position is in focus, and to perform display effect with a sense of depth.

Feature C2. The data generation means generates the generated data based on setting image data, and further sets the image data in a state where a depth parameter corresponding to a display position in the depth direction is applied. On the basis of this, the display mode is such that the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction,
The generated data has many unit data in which color information is set,
The blur setting means is
Parameter deriving means for deriving the depth parameter for each of the data corresponding to the image data set in the setting storage means and causing the unit data (Performing steps S3101 to S3107 in VDP 135 Function),
By performing blurring generation processing on data in which the depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter, blurring execution is performed such that the image portion corresponding to the data is displayed in a blurred state A unit (function of executing steps S3110 to S3115 in the VDP 135);
The gaming machine according to feature C1, comprising:

  According to the feature C2, since it is not necessary to store in advance the image data to be in the blurred state, it is possible to perform the display in the blurred state while reducing the data capacity. In addition, since the depth parameter is derived for each of the data giving rise to each unit data, it is possible to finely control the display in the blurred state.

Feature C3. The display effect in the display means includes a blur display effect in which the display in the blurred state is performed over a plurality of update timings,
The game machine according to the feature C2, wherein the parameter deriving means performs the derivation of the depth parameter at each of one update timing of the one blur display effect and another update timing. .

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to change the display of the blurred state according to the progress of the display effect.

Feature C4. The data generation means arranges image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space Viewpoint setting means (function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP 135), and projecting image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane And setting means for drawing (function to execute the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The parameter deriving means derives the depth parameter for each unit data included in the data of the two-dimensional information after the projection;
The gaming machine according to the feature C 2 or C 3, wherein the blurring execution means executes the blurring generation processing on the data of the two-dimensional information after the projection using the depth parameter. .

  According to the feature C4, the processing load is reduced because the depth parameter is derived and the blurring generation process is performed not on the data of the three-dimensional information but on the data of the two-dimensional information. However, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

  Feature C5. The blur execution unit blends the color information of unit data included in the data of the two-dimensional information after the projection with the color information of unit data around it as the blur generation processing (steps S3206 and S3212 in VDP 135) And the function to execute step S3217), the gaming machine according to the feature C4.

  According to the feature C5, since the process of blending at the occurrence of blurring is executed, it is possible to perform the display of the blurred state according to the type of the image displayed at the time of the display effect in the blurred state. The display of the blurred state can be suitably performed. In this case, the process of blending is not performed on the data of three-dimensional information, but is performed on the data of two-dimensional information. Can be suitably performed.

Feature C6. The data generation means arranges image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space Viewpoint setting means (function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP 135), and projecting image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane And setting means for drawing (function to execute the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The blurring setting means is characterized in that the object individual image is displayed in a blurred state by performing blurring generation processing on the data of the two-dimensional information after the projection. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5.

  According to the feature C6, since the blurring generation processing is performed not on the data of the three-dimensional information but on the data of the two-dimensional information, the processing load is reduced while the above-described processing is performed. It is possible to achieve excellent effects.

  Feature C7. When the blur setting means performs display in the blurred state, the special image (individual images CH15 and CH16) exists at a position shifted in the depth direction with respect to the reference position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, which is excluded from the display targets in the blurred state even if it is displayed so as to be recognized by the player.

  According to the feature C7, when performing display in a blurred state, display in a uniformly blurred state is applied to the individual image displayed as being present at a position shifted from the reference position If it tries, the possibility of making it hard to recognize the information which should be made to be recognized to a player arises. On the other hand, with regard to the special image, regardless of whether or not the special image is displayed as being present at the reference position, the above-described inconvenience is caused by the configuration in which the special image is excluded from the display target in the blurred state. It is possible to realize display in a blurred state while suppressing the occurrence of

  The special image includes a teaching image used to teach the player the game situation.

  Feature C8. The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the special image is an image displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present on the near side in the depth direction with respect to the reference position.

  According to the feature C8, in the configuration in which the special image is excluded from the display target in the blurred state, it is easy for the player to recognize that the special image is intentionally excluded. Therefore, the special image can be excluded from the display objects in the blurred state without giving a sense of discomfort to the display effect in the blurred state.

Feature C9. It has operation accepting means (operation device for effect 48) for accepting an operation by a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, wherein the blurring setting means changes the reference position based on an operation of the player on the operation receiving means.

  According to the feature C9, the unification of the display effect in the blurred state is suppressed, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display effect.

  Feature C10. The blur setting means does not display the blurred state in a predetermined first display period (game time), and the processing load of processing excluding the process required for the blurred state display is the first display The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9, wherein the blurred state is displayed in a second display period (round game) lower than the period.

  According to the feature C10, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load on update timing when displaying a blurred state.

Feature C11. The data generation means generates the generated data based on setting of image data.
The blur setting means is configured to display the target individual image in a blurred state by blending at least a part of color information determined by the image data with color information of the periphery thereof. A game machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that

  According to the feature C11, since the process of blending at the occurrence of blurring is executed, it is possible to display the blurred state according to the type of the image displayed at the time of the display effect in the blurred state. The display of the blurred state can be suitably performed.

Feature C12. The data generation means generates the generated data based on setting image data, and further sets the image data in a state where a depth parameter corresponding to a display position in the depth direction is applied. On the basis of this, the display mode is such that the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction,
The blurring setting unit blurs the target individual image corresponding to the image data by performing blurring generation processing on the image data in which the depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter. To be displayed in the state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C11, wherein the reference parameter has a predetermined parameter range such that the reference position corresponds to a predetermined range in the depth direction.

  According to the feature C12, it is possible to display a blurred state in a state where the depth of field is expanded to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display in a blurred state.

  Feature C13. The blur setting means is at a position farther in the depth direction than the predetermined distance than an image recognized by the player as being present at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the depth direction from the reference position. The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C12, wherein the degree of the image recognized by the player to be displayed in the blurred state is increased when the image is recognized.

  According to the feature C13, it is possible to more realistically display the blurred state.

Feature C14. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (The function to execute the processing of step S1006 in VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (rendering data (rendering data) based on the data projected on the projection plane And generation setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) for generating the generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) Memory means to store And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In the gaming machine provided with
The display mode of the image on the display unit includes a mode in which a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display unit. ,
The data generation means is an individual image displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present on the near side in the depth direction with respect to the predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the far side in the depth direction The target individual image, which is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present in the image, is contoured in comparison with the image recognized by the player as being present at the reference position. A gaming machine characterized by further comprising blurring setting means (function to execute adjustment processing for focusing effect in VDP 135) to be displayed in a blurred state when lines become unclear.

  According to the feature C14, it is possible to perform display effect as if the reference position is in focus, and it is possible to perform display effect with a sense of depth.

  The invention of the feature C group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, the display unit displays an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object which is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is pasted to the object. Drawing data is created by projecting an object to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, in order to increase the player's attention to the display effect, it is preferable to perform more realistic image display, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of the image;
Equipped with
In the gaming machine, the data generation means generates the generation data based on applying image data and applying parameter data for determining a display mode of the image by the image data.
The generated data has many unit data in which color information is set,
The data generation means is a set data derivation means (steps in VDP 135) for deriving set data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blurring map data) to be used for each generation unit data for generating the respective unit data The function of executing S2503 and the function of executing steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135 is applied, and each unit parameter data included in the set data derived by the set data deriving means is applied to each of the generation unit data Generates the generated data, and generates the generated data in which individual images of the same type are displayed in different manners by changing at least one of the application method of the aggregate data and the content of the aggregate data to be applied A gaming machine characterized by being

  According to the feature D1, since each unit parameter data group is treated as aggregate data, the process can be simplified regarding data handling. In addition, by changing at least one of the method of applying the group data and the contents of the group data to be applied, generated data is generated that will cause the individual images of the same type to be displayed in different modes. It is possible to achieve diversification of display effects while suppressing the data amount of image data to be stored in advance.

  Feature D2. The aggregate data deriving means derives the aggregate data by reading out the aggregate data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) from the storage means (memory module 133). The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while reducing the processing load.

Feature D3. The data generation means arranges image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space Viewpoint setting means (function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP 135), and projecting image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane And setting means for drawing (function to execute the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The set data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) derived by the set data deriving means is applied to image data of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that

  According to the feature D3, the arrangement mode of the image data of the three-dimensional information can be changed by using the collective data, so that it is possible to perform more complicated image display while realizing realistic image display. It becomes. In this case, when the complex image display is performed, since the set data is used as described above, it is possible to balance both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature D4. The set data deriving means derives the set data (the blurring map data) by specifying each of the unit parameter data (Z value) according to the set state in a state in which the image data is set. And
The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying the derived set data to data generated from the image data. Features D1 to D3 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature D4, since it is not necessary to store aggregate data in advance, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while reducing the data capacity.

  Feature D5. The set data deriving means is configured to derive the set data corresponding to each of the generated data in a situation where the generated data is generated using the set data. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5, different set data can be used at each update timing, and diversification of display effects can be achieved. Even in this case, the collective data is not stored in advance, but is created each time, so it is possible to diversify the display effects while reducing the data capacity.

Feature D6. The data generation means arranges image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space Viewpoint setting means (function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP 135), and projecting image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane And setting means for drawing (function to execute the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The aggregate data deriving means derives the aggregate data (the blurring map data) by specifying the unit parameter data (Z value) according to the arrangement mode of the image data of the object by the arranging means. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5, characterized in that

  According to the feature D6, in a configuration that realizes realistic image display by using image data of three-dimensional information, collective data is created according to a data setting mode that enables the realistic image display. It is possible to prevent the use of aggregate data from adversely affecting realistic image display.

Feature D7. The data generation means arranges image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space Viewpoint setting means (function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP 135), and projecting image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane And setting means for drawing (function to execute the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The set data (blur map data) derived by the set data deriving unit is applied to data of two-dimensional information after the projection described in any one of the features D1 to D6. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D7, the set data is not applied to the data of the three-dimensional information, but is applied to the data of the two-dimensional information, so that the processing load is reduced. It is possible to achieve such excellent effects as

  Feature D8. The display mode of the individual image of the same type is based on the data generation means making the mode in the case of applying the unit parameter data of the aggregate data to the unit data for generation different among a plurality of update timings. It is equipped with generation execution means (the function to execute the processing of step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S2512 in VDP 135, function to execute step S1010 to step S1012) corresponding to changing. A game machine according to any one of features D1 to D7 characterized in that:

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to change the display mode of individual images of the same type between a plurality of update timings while using single collective data. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while balancing the data capacity and the processing load.

  Feature D9. Correspondence change means (step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S25 in VDP 135) for changing the correspondence between the unit parameter data and the unit data for generation according to the switching of the update timing. The gaming machine according to the feature D8, comprising a function of executing the process of S2512).

  According to the feature D9, since the display mode of the image is changed between the plurality of update timings by switching the correspondence between the unit parameter data and the generation unit data, the display of the image is performed while using the collective data. In the configuration in which the aspect is changed, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

  Feature D10. A plurality of application means for causing the contents of a plurality of unit parameter data to be reflected on one data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each of the generation unit data (steps S2506 and S2507 in VDP 135) , A function to execute the processing of step S2511 and step S2512), The gaming machine according to the feature D8 or D9.

  According to the feature D10, in the configuration in which the display mode is changed while referring to the unit parameter data, diversification of the display mode to be changed is achieved.

Feature D11. The aggregate data deriving means is for deriving a plurality of aggregate data,
The generation execution means is
A plurality of application means for reflecting the contents of each unit parameter data of the plurality of aggregate data with respect to one data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each of the generation unit data (steps S2507 and S2512 in VDP 135 Function to execute the processing of
In each of the generation unit data, the correspondence between the data to which the unit parameter data is applied and the unit parameter data is changed along with the switching of the update timing, and the change of the correspondence is made of the plurality of aggregate data. Correspondence relationship changing means (functions of executing the processing of step S2506 and step S2511 in the VDP 135) to be performed for each;
The gaming machine according to feature D8, comprising:

  According to the feature D11, it is possible to change the display mode in a complicated manner while facilitating the design of the collective data in the gaming machine design stage.

Feature D12. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (The function to execute the processing of step S1006 in VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (rendering data (rendering data) based on the data projected on the projection plane And generation setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) for generating the generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) Memory means to store And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In the gaming machine provided with
The generated data has many unit data in which color information is set,
The data generation means is a set data derivation means (steps in VDP 135) for deriving set data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blurring map data) to be used for each generation unit data for generating the respective unit data The function of executing S2503 and the function of executing steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135 is applied, and each unit parameter data included in the set data derived by the set data deriving means is applied to each of the generation unit data Generates the generated data, and generates the generated data in which individual images of the same type are displayed in different manners by changing at least one of the application method of the aggregate data and the content of the aggregate data to be applied A gaming machine characterized by being

  According to the feature D12, since each unit parameter data group is treated as aggregate data, the process can be simplified regarding data handling. In addition, by changing at least one of the method of applying the group data and the contents of the group data to be applied, generated data is generated that will cause the individual images of the same type to be displayed in different modes. It is possible to achieve diversification of display effects while suppressing the data amount of image data to be stored in advance.

  The invention of the feature D group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  To explain in more detail the case of displaying an image using two-dimensional image data, the memory for image data stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. It is done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated with respect to a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, the display unit displays an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object which is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is pasted to the object. Drawing data is created by projecting an object to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (The function to execute the processing of step S1006 in VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (rendering data (rendering data) based on the data projected on the projection plane And generation setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) for generating the generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) Memory means to store And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31) and updating the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. Display circuit 155),
In the gaming machine provided with
The data generation means includes texture setting means (a function for executing texture mapping processing for a special character in VDP) for setting image data of texture to image data of the object.
The predetermined object data (special object PC 20) used when displaying a predetermined individual image (special character) as the image data of the object is included, and is further set to the predetermined object data as the image data of the texture Include predetermined texture data (first partial textures PC21 to PC23, second partial textures PC24 to PC27),
The predetermined texture data is
First texture data (first partial textures PC21 to PC23) set for first part data (main body part unit BP) of the predetermined object data;
Second texture data (second partial textures PC24 to PC27) set for the second part data (attached part parts AP1 to AP4) of the predetermined object data;
Is included,
The texture setting unit
First setting means (function of executing steps S3401 to S3403 in the VDP 135) for changing the type of the first texture data to be set for the first part data;
When setting the second texture data with respect to the second part data, the second setting unit changes the setting positional relationship of the second texture data with respect to the second part data (step S3405 to step S3409 in the VDP 135). Function to execute)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when changing the appearance of the predetermined individual image, the type of texture data to be set is not changed collectively, but the type is changed for the first texture data which is a part of the texture data For the second texture data that is another part of the texture data, the setting positional relationship with respect to the second part data is changed. As a result, while the appearance of the predetermined individual image is changed in a complicated manner, the data capacity of the other part is reduced instead of reducing the complexity of the change of the appearance. Therefore, it is possible to change the appearance of the predetermined individual image as described above while balancing the data capacity and the processing load.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein a proportion of the second part data in the predetermined individual image is smaller than a proportion of the first part data.

  According to the feature E2, the area in which the setting positional relationship is changed instead of the type of texture data is scarcely changed in the case where the appearance is changed as compared with the area in which the type is not changing Although the former area is smaller, it is possible for the player to recognize that the appearance of the predetermined individual image as a whole is largely changed.

  Feature E3. In the area occupied by the first part data in the predetermined individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data, there is an image portion (pattern portion of eyes or mouth) whose relative position with respect to a specific outer edge portion does not change in the predetermined individual image A game machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that

  According to the feature E3, since the image portion which is not preferable when the relative position changes is set as the first texture data, it is possible to preferably change the appearance of the region including the image portion.

  Feature E4. The second texture data is characterized in that the color information set in one boundary portion has continuity with the color information set in the opposite boundary portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E3.

  According to the feature E4, in the case where the setting positional relationship of the second texture data is changed, the occurrence of the boundary of the pattern in the predetermined individual image is suppressed.

Feature E5. There are a plurality of combinations of the second part data and the second texture data,
The features E1 to E4 are characterized in that the second setting means changes the setting positional relationship of the other second texture data when changing the setting positional relationship of one of the second texture data. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature E5, in a configuration in which a plurality of second texture data exist, the processing load required for setting the second texture data can be reduced.

  The invention of the feature E group is effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  Also, in recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object which is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is pasted to the object. Generated data is generated by projecting an object to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased.

  Hereinafter, basic configurations of various game machines to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means A game machine, wherein variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display apparatus, 48 ... Operation device for effects, 131 ... Display CPU, 133 ... Memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142 ... Frame buffer, 151 ... Geometry operation part, 152 ... Rendering part, 155 ... Display circuit, AP1 to AP4 ... attached parts, BP ... body parts, CH15 ... individual image for teaching, CH16 ... individual image for teaching, KD1 ... first key data, KD2 ... second key data, ND1 ... second 1 Normal Map Data, ND 2 ... Second Normal Map Data, PC 17 ... Object for Particle Dispersion, PC 19 ... Object for Sea Surface, PC 20 ... Special Object, PC 21 to PC 23 ... First Partial Texture, PC 24 to PC 27 ... Second Partial Texture , PT1 ... particle single image, PT 2 ... particle single image, SD ... surface data, SD ... Applies to the surface data, SD2 ... the surface data of the buffer.

Claims (1)

Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object that is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint Storage means for storing the generated data generated by the data generation means, comprising: image setting means for projecting the image data and generating generation data based on the data projected onto the projection plane;
Display control means for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means;
In the gaming machine provided with
The image data of an object to be placed in the virtual three-dimensional space by the placement means has data capable of defining a plurality of faces, and a three-dimensional shape can be determined by the plurality of face data. Image data of multi-faced object is included,
The data generation means
When the image data of the multi-faced object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space to display a multi-faced image corresponding to the image data of the multi-faced object over a plurality of update timings, the virtual three-dimensional of the plurality of face data Data reading means for reading group data from the memory means which makes it possible to individually change each direction in the space;
Application changing means for changing the mode in the case of applying the aggregate data to the image data of the multi-faced object among the plurality of update timings;
By changing color information to be applied to the surface data whose orientation has been changed, in units of the surface data according to the orientation of the surface data, a display color of at least a part of the multi-face image A display color changing unit that enables an image display to be different between a plurality of update timings;
Equipped with
The aggregate data includes unit control data for determining the orientation of one of the surface data in a number larger than the number of the surface data.
The data reading means reads a plurality of sets of data,
The application changing means applies the unit control data of each of a plurality of the aggregate data to the one surface data, and the application change means applies the unit control data of the plurality of aggregate data to the image data of the multi-surface object. By changing the positional relationship in the virtual three-dimensional space along with the switching of the update timing, the surface data to which a plurality of unit control data are applied in the image data of the multi-surface object and the plurality of unit control data A game machine characterized by changing the correspondence relationship of (1) with the switching of the update timing.

Images